Home

Netopia 4000-Series Network Router User Manual

1. 0 006 4 19 Allowing VPNs through a Firewall sccsseseseeeneeeeeneeeees 4 19 PPT P1 X aM DIG osisniccns aracndcascdevecaamecettonsezenscaxydeisocns 4 20 ATIMP Example asada E 4 22 Windows Networking BroadcCasts cccsseseeeeeneeeeneeeees 4 25 Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNS 2 c0s cesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 OVERVIEW anres aaa e aE E O 5 1 Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration c csccseenees 5 2 vi Firmware User Guide Adding an IKE Phase 1 Profile sscssssseeeeees 5 4 Changing an IKE Phase 1 Profile scsseesees 5 8 Key Mana gemini armspieren 5 9 IPsec WAN Configuration SCreens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 5 18 IPsec Manual Key EN Ys ssinscacsnnepuccnteresnnctentsrenupenenctade 5 19 VPINPQUICKVICWS xxtutincassatekvecsndiaeapeptaxeuscninteenccnade 5 20 WAN Event History Error Reporting sccseeeee 5 21 Chapter 6 IP Setup sccevsiccisessccccisscsecscescustevensescsseescscceseueeevensd 6 1 IP SetU ieii a a a a aa 6 2 IP SUNDNES i a 6 4 StatUG VOULES corsaire aiaa 6 6 RIP 2 MDS A thenticatiON rrisni sinisas 6 10 OVEIVIEW sosisini riaa 6 10 Authentication configurato M s seinnse 6 10 Connection Profiles and Default Profile 6 16 IP Address Serving eocccwcavessvedacesevesdaw Sadetwacscccaetasereseusds 6 17 IPAddress POOlSiininnen nthe tise 6 20 DHCP NetBIOS Option satsicidiscsceeavionsnanside
2. csscssssscseeeeees 2 35 IPSS CUP eteuadecenceacteich E A A E 2 36 Filter SOUS seers a EE 2 36 IP Address SOMVING ararnir panan ania 2 36 Network Address Translation NAT s0sec0eees 2 36 Stateful Inspection firewall cccscceceeeeeeeees 2 37 Date and UME gosia 2 42 Console CONMBURAUION cssscncreaivecwadanossteacutcsecandektn 2 43 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 2 43 SECUN ercran anra ea E 2 43 Upgrade Feature Set vcs ccivesactinantnndeisscsersieneslensasescs 2 43 RFC 1483 Transparent Bridging sscsscssesee 2 44 WO BOMB srra a aa a aa iaa 2 46 Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation 5 3 1 OVE VIE Wiss r a a E a RE 3 1 FO QUUNGS dairenin a 3 2 Supported tralfiC srera epi a EER 3 5 Support for Microsoft Network MSN Messenger 3 5 Support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM FIG IAMNSION gunner n 3 5 M kiNAT CornmguratiOnicdsccece cs cfatictasdseng sactecacteadaveanetacieees 3 6 Easy Setup Profile Configuration sccscseeeneeeeenes 3 6 Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration 3 7 PES SUID emn e 3 7 ModifVihge Map StS sssini 3 13 Addie Server LISTS siss sorsi neonan Er Taria 3 15 Modifying Server StS eisien dd ssarsesesadave ance athe 3 18 Deleting a server sevese seas cascesaacers caceresareanaisesnanseses 3 20 Binding Map Lists and Server Lists ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 21 Contents v IP profile PArAIMEEYS wi
3. Main oe Backup Management Menu m Statistics amp Logs Statistics The Backup Management Statistics screen appears Backup Management Statistics Current Gateway Primary Backup State Primary Port Failure in Progress Reason Loss of Layer 1 Time Since Detection 0 14 Switchover Time 1 00 FORCE BACKUP Current Gateway is a display only field that shows which port is currently in operation Backup State is a display only field that shows the current state of Backup or Recovery m Reason is a display only field that shows the cause for the current state of Backup or Recovery Time Since Detection is a display only field that is only visible if backup or recovery is in progress It displays the elapsed time since detection of either primary WAN line failure or re establishment of the connection Switchover Time is a display only field that is only visible if backup or recovery is in progress It displays the time until either automatic Backup or Recovery m The FORCE BACKUP FORCE RECOVERY option is a selectable option that depending on the current state of backup will force the switching of ports If you are currently in backup mode the option will be FORCE RECOVERY If you are currently in normal WAN link mode the option will be FORCE BACKUP Selecting Line Backup 7 17 either one and pressing Return will force the link to switch to the other mode QuickView The QuickView screen now
4. Static addresses are useful in cases when you want to make sure that a host on your network cannot have its address taken away by the address server Appropriate candidates for a static address include a network administrator s computer a computer dedicated to communicating with the Internet and routers Using address serving The Router provides three ways to serve IP addresses to computers on a network The first Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is supported by PCs with Microsoft Windows and a TCP IP stack Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system may also be able to use DHCP The second way MacIP is for Macintosh computers The third way called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients IPCP is used to fulfill WAN client requirements The Router can use both DHCP and MacIP Whether you use one or both depends on your particular networking environment If that environment includes both PCs and Macintosh computers that do not use Open Transport you need to use both DHCP and MaclP to distribute IP addresses to all of your computers Serve dynamic WAN clients The third method used to fulfill WAN client requirements is called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients The correct term or protocol is a subset of the PPP suite call IPCP Originally this would apply only to switched WAN interface routers and not to leased line routers However a new feature can give you Asynchronous PPP dial in support on the Auxi
5. When you are prepared contact Netopia Technical Support by e mail telephone or post Internet ask_netopia netopia com for technical support info netopia com for general information Phone 1 510 597 5400 Netopia Inc Customer Services 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville California 94608 USA Online product information Product information can be found in the following Netopia World Wide Web server via http www netopia com Internet via anonymous FTP to ftp netopia com pub Understanding IP Addressing B 1 Appendix B Understanding IP Addressing This appendix is a brief general introduction to IP addressing A basic understanding of IP will help you in configuring the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 and using some of its powerful features such as static routes and packet filtering This section covers the following topics m What is IP on page B 1 m About IP Addressing on page B 1 m Distributing IP Addresses on page B 5 m Nested IP Subnets on page B 11 m Broadcasts on page B 14 What is IP All networks use protocols to establish common standards for communication One widely used network protocol is the Internet Protocol also known as IP Like many other protocols IP uses packets or formatted chunks of data to communicate In packets a header is part of the envelope information that surrounds the actual data being transmitted In e mail a header is usually the address and
6. m In order to work correctly you must define a host or node address in the IP Profile Parameters of the Connection Profile This is accomplished by specifying the IP address that is to be statically served via the WAN and then by entering a mask value of 255 255 255 255 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses Before you allocate IP addresses using DHCP and MaclIP consider whether you need to set aside any static addresses Note any planned and currently used static addresses before you use DHCP and MaclIP Avoid fragmenting your block of IP addresses For example try to use a continuous range for the static addresses you choose B 10 Firmware User Guide ee 1 Distributed to the Router E hernet IP address Manually distributed static 2 3 H 15 16 Pool of addresses distributed 10 by MaclP and DHCP 11 12 Block of IP host addresses ra derived from network IP address mask issued by ISP 15 The figure above shows an example of a block of IP addresses being distributed correctly OWONDOTBWNHE The example follows these rules m An IP address must not be used as a static address if it is also in a range of addresses being distributed by DHCP or MaclP m A single IP address range is used by all the address served clients These include DHCP BootP MaclIP and WAN clients even though Boot
7. Before creating filter sets you should read the next few sections to learn more about how these powerful security tools work What s a filter and what s a filter set A filter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can flow in and out of your network A particular filter can be either an input filter one that is used on data packets coming in to your network from the Internet or an output filter one that is used on data packets going out from your network to the Internet A filter set is a group of filters that work together to check incoming or outgoing data A filter set can consist of a combination of input and output filters How filter sets work A filter set acts like a team of customs inspectors Each filter is an inspector through which incoming and outgoing packages must pass The inspectors work as a team but each inspects every package individually Security 10 19 Each inspector has a specific task One inspector s task may be to examine the destination address of all outgoing packages That inspector looks for a certain destination which could be as specific as a street address or as broad as an entire country and checks each package s destination address to see if it matches that destination A filter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages Filter priority Continuing the customs inspectors analogy imagine the i
8. Public Range defines an external address range and indicates what type of mapping to apply when using this range The types of mapping available are dynamic static and pat Map Lists define collections of mapping rules A rule maps interior range addresses to exterior range addresses by the mapping techniques defined in the map list Server Lists bind internal IP addresses and ports to external IP addresses and ports so that connections initiated from the outside can access an interior server Multiple Network Address Translation 3 9 NAT rules The following rules apply to assigning NAT ranges and server lists m Static public address ranges must not overlap other static PAT public addresses or the public address assigned to the router s WAN interface m APAT public address must not overlap any static address ranges It may be the same as another PAT address or server list address but the port range must not overlap You configure the ranges of exterior addresses by first adding public ranges Select Add Public Range and press Return The Add NAT Public Range screen appears Add NAT Public Range Range Name my first_range Type pat Public Address 206 1 1 6 First Public Port Last Public Port ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE m Select Range Name and give a descriptive name to this range m Select Type and from the pop up menu assign its type Options are static dynamic or pat the default m If you choose pat as
9. 0 0 Dest IP Address 0 De Q TOS i TOS Mask PrOTOCO ype ADD THIS FILTER NOW Return Enter to add this Filter to the Filter Set Enter the packet specific information for this filter Note Default Forwarding Filter If you create one or more filters that have a matching action of forward then action on a packet matching none of the filters is to block any traffic Therefore if the behavior you want is to force the routing of a certain type of packet and pass all others through the normal routing mechanism you must configure one filter to match the first type of packet and apply Force Routing A subsequent filter is required to match and forward all other packets Management IP traffic If the Force Routing filter is applied to source IP addresses it may inadvertently block communication with the router itself You can avoid this by preceding the Force Routing filter with a filter that matches the destination IP address of the router itself Security 10 37 Firewall Tutorial General firewall terms Filter rule A filter set is comprised of individual filter rules Filter set A grouping of individual filter rules Firewall A component or set of components that restrict access between a protected network and the Internet or between two networks Host A workstation on the network Packet Unit of communication on the Internet Packet filter Packet filters allow or deny packets based on source or destinati
10. 0 0 0 0 m Destination IP address mask 0 0 0 0 3 Using the tables on page 10 21 find the destination port and protocol numbers the ocal Telnet port m Proto TCP or 6 m OD Port 23 4 The filter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet packets containing the source address shown in step 2 m On Yes m Fwd No This four step process is how we produced the following filter from the original rule 192 211 211 17 0 0 0 0 Filtering example 2 Suppose a filter is configured to block all incoming IP packets with the source IP address of 200 233 14 0 regardless of the type of connection or its destination The filter would look like this Security 10 25 This filter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with the IP network address 200 233 14 0 The O at the end of the address signifies any host on the class C IP network 200 233 14 0 If for example the filter is applied to a packet with the source IP address 200 233 14 5 it will block it In this case the mask which does not appear in the table must be set to 255 255 255 0 This way all packets with a source address of 200 233 14 x will be matched correctly no matter what the final address byte is Note The protocol attribute for this filter is O by default This tells the filter to ignore the IP protocol or type of IP packet Design guidelines Careful thought must go into designing a new filter set You should consider the follo
11. B 3 Example Working with a Class C subnet 06 B 5 Distributing IP Addresses 0 2 cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeece eee eeaeeeneeeaeee B 5 Technical note on subnet masking eeeee B 6 Configuratio ensaian E B 7 Manually distributing IP addresses eeeeeee B 8 Using address SEl VINE siscinssdetscntsnacanansasdadonmnerawensns B 8 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses B 9 Nested IP SUDMOUS senian B 11 Broadcasts senimi nnna R B 14 Firmware User Guide Packet header types Appendix C Binary Conversion Table Index Introduction 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction This Firmware User Guide covers the advanced features of the Netopia 4000 Series Router and IAD families Your Netopia equipment offers advanced configuration features in addition to Easy Setup The advanced feature screens are accessed through the Main Menu of the console configuration screen This Firmware User Guide documents the advanced features including advanced testing security monitoring and configuration features This Firmware User Guide should be used as a companion to the Easy Setup configuration instructions in the Netopia Router Getting Started guide or the applicable User s Reference Guide You should read the Getting Started guide before reading this Firmware User Guide Note This Guide also includes descriptions of new features and changes to the functionality of the firmware for the current release
12. Key ID Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Valid 10 10 2002 12 00 AM Infinite 255 3 11 2000 3 17 PM 8 6 2002 1 24 AM Delete Key Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Note The date and time formats are determined by the system date and time formats If the current date and time fall within the range of dates and times the Valid field indicates yes otherwise it indicates no You modify the Change Key menu in the same way as in the Add Key menu see Adding a key on page 14 If you select Delete Key a pop up menu will ask you to confirm your choice Are you sure you want to delete this RIP MD5 Key CONTINUE 6 16 Firmware User Guide Connection Profiles and Default Profile RIP 2 MD5 authentication may be configured in Connection Profiles as well If you are not using NAT your public Internet connection can benefit from sending authenticated RIP packets as well as receiving them To configure RIP 2 MD5 authentication for a Connection Profile you can either change an existing Connection Profile or create a new one The Default Profile Leased and Switched menus are the same as the Connection Profile RIP option and associated menus For brevity the following example shows only the Connection Profile RIP option and associated menus In either case navigate to the RIP Profile Parameters screen under the IP Profile Parameters menu of the Display Change
13. Local WAN IP Address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 255 Filter Set Basic Firewall Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here 3 22 Firmware User Guide m Select NAT Map List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined map lists IP Profile Parameters NAT Map List Name Address Trans Easy PAT s IP Addressing my map mbered lt lt None gt gt NAT Map List sy PAT NAT Server Li Local WAN IP Remote IP Add 7 0 0 2 Remote IP Mas 5 255 255 255 Filter Set tBIOS Filter Remove Filter Receive RIP th Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m Select the map list you want to bind to this Connection Profile and press Return The map list you selected will now be bound to this Connection Profile m Select NAT Server List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined server lists IP Profile Parameters NAT Server List Name Address Trans Easy Servers s IP Addressing my_servers mbered lt lt None gt gt NAT Map List NAT Server Li Local WAN IP Local WAN IP Remote IP Add 0 2 Remote IP Mas 5 255 255 255 Filter Set tBIOS Filter Remove Filter Receive RIP th Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m Select the server list you want to bind to this C
14. Technical Support on page A 4 Configuration Problems If you encounter problems during your initial configuration process review the following suggestions before calling for technical support There are four zones to consider when troubleshooting initial configuration 1 The computer s connection to the router 2 The router s connection to the telecommunication line s 3 The telecommunication line s connection to your ISP 4 The ISP s connection to the Internet If the connection from the computer to the router was not successful verify that the following conditions are in effect m The Router is turned on m An Ethernet cable connects your PC s Ethernet card or built in Ethernet port to the Router m Telnet is available on your PC or Macintosh On a PC it must be specified in your system path You can usually find the application as c windows telnet exe m Your PC or Macintosh is properly configured for TCP IP m Your PC or Macintosh has an IP address m Your PC or Macintosh has a subnet mask that matches or is compatible with the Router s subnet mask A 2 Firmware User Guide Note If you are attempting to modify the IP address or subnet mask from a previous successful configuration attempt you will need to clear the IP address or reset your Router to the factory default before reinitiating the configuration process For further information on resetting your Router to factory default see How to Res
15. m What is not explicitly denied is allowed The first rule is far more secure and is the best approach to firewall design It is far easier and more secure to allow in or out only certain services and deny anything else If the other rule is used you would have to figure out everything that you want to disallow now and in the future Firewall Logic Firewall design is a test of logic and filter rule ordering is critical If a packet is forwarded through a series of filter rules and then the packet matches a rule the appropriate action is taken The packet will not forward through the remainder of the filter rules For example if you had the following filter set Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Allow SMTP access Deny all other packets and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would forward through the first rule WWW go through the second rule FTP and match this rule the packet is allowed through If you had this filter set for example Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Deny FTP access Deny all other packets Security 10 39 and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would forward through the first filter rule WWW match the second rule FTP and the packet is allowed through Even though the next rule is to deny all FTP traffic the FTP packet will never make it to this rule Binary representation It is easiest when doing filtering to c
16. strong encryption Unlike MS CHAP version 1 which supports one way authentication MS CHAP version 2 supports mutual authentication between connected routers and is incompatible with MS CHAP version 1 MS CHAP V1 When you choose MS CHAP as the authentication method for the PPTP tunnel the Netopia router will start negotiating MS CHAP V2 If the router you are connecting to does not support MS CHAP V2 it will fall back to MS CHAP V1 or if the router you are connecting to does not support MPPE at all the PPP session will be dropped You can specify a Send Host Name which is used with Send Secret for authenticating with a remote PNS when the profile is used for initiating a tunnel connection You must specify a Send Password the CHAP and MS CHAP term for password used for authenticating the tunnel when initiating a tunnel connection You can specify a Receive Host Name which is used with the Receive Secret for authenticating a remote PPTP client You must specify a Receive Password used for authenticating the remote PPTP client You can specify that this router will Initiate Connections acting as a PAC or only answer them acting as a PNS Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand however you can disable this feature When disabled the tunnel must be manually established or may be scheduled using the scheduled connections feature See Scheduled Connections on page 2 29 Some networks that use Microsoft Windows NT PPTP Net
17. Add Map allows you to add a new map to the map list m Show Change Maps allows you to modify the individual maps within the list Delete Map allows you to delete a map from the list Selecting Show Change Maps or Delete Map displays the same pop up menu Show Change NAT Map List Type Public Address Range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 254 pat 206 1 1 6 192 168 1 253 192 168 1 254 static 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 2 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 252 dynamic 206 1 1 3 206 1 1 5 Scroll to the map you want to modify using the arrow keys and press Return The Change NAT Map screen appears Change NAT Map my _map First Private Address 192 168 1 253 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range my second_range Public Range Type is static Public Range Start Address is 206 1 1 1 Public Range End Address is 206 1 1 2 CHANGE NAT MAP Make any modifications you need and then select CHANGE NAT MAP and press Return Your changes will become effective and you will be returned to the Show Change NAT Map List screen Multiple Network Address Translation 3 15 Adding Server Lists Server lists also known as Exports are handled similarly to map lists If you want to make a particular server s port accessible and it isn t accessible through other means such as a static mapping you must create a server list Select Add Server List from the Network Address Translation screen The Add NAT Server List screen appears A
18. Backup is Disabled Requires Failure of minutes Manual Ping Host Name or IP Address Automatic Recovery to ADSL Automatic Requires Recovery of minutes 1 Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 No Automatically switches to Backup Port on loss of Layer 1 or 2 This screen is used to configure the conditions under which backup will occur if it will recover and how the alternate gateway is configured Select Backup is and press Return A pop up menu allows you to select Disabled Manual or Automatic You enable backup by selecting either Manual or Automatic If you enable backup the subsequent menu items become visible Select Requires Data Link Failure of minutes Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before the backup port becomes enabled in the event of primary line failure This allows you to be sure the WAN connection is not merely briefly interrupted before the router switches to backup mode Select Ping Host Name or IP Address and enter an IP address or resolvable DNS name that the router will ping This is an optional item that is particularly useful for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection has gone down Should this address become unreachable the router will treat this as a loss of connectivity and begin the backup timer This loss is a Layer 2 loss Select Recovery to WAN_name where WAN_name is the type of WAN connection you have such as ADSL and press Return Choose either Manual or A
19. Both share the same lines on the telephone poles or underground on the street These calls are virtual private networks Virtual because they appear to be direct connections between the calling and answering parties even though they travel over the public wires and switches of the phone company private because neither pair of calling and answering parties interacts with the other and networks because they exchange information Computers can do the same thing it s called Virtual Private Networks VPNs Equipped with a Router a single computer or private network LAN can establish a private connection with another computer or private network over the public network Internet 4 2 Firmware User Guide The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 can be used in VPNs either to initiate the connection or to answer it When used in this way the routers are said to be tunnelling through the public network Internet The advantages are that like your long distance phone call you don t need a direct line between one computer or LAN and the other but use the local connections making it much cheaper and the information you exchange through your tunnel is private and secure Tunneling is a process of creating a private path between a remote user or private network and another private network over some intermediate network such as the IP based Internet A VPN allows remote offices or employees access to your internal business LAN through means of encryp
20. DLCI Number 16 991 16 Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Data Flow Parameters Use Default Value CIR Yes Bc Yes Be Yes ADD DLCI NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Here you configure the parameters for a single DLCI Data Link Circuit ID Select DLCI Name and enter a name for this individual Frame Relay DLCI profile It can be any name you want For example the name of your ISP or remote branch you re connecting to such as the corporate headquarters of your company Note The Netopia Router allows Frame Relay DLCls to be named so that you can easily reference and differentiate them This is accomplished by giving a DLC Name to a DLC Number Select DLCI Enabled and toggle it to Yes to activate the profile If you disable this profile the Netopia Router will automatically disable and block access to a specific remote DLCI Select DLCI Number 16 991 and enter a number for this individual DLC Check with your Frame Relay provider to find out what numbers are allocated for each of your DLCI profiles The DLCI number range should fall within the range of 16 991 Select Remote IP Address and enter the remote IP address your ISP or network administrator gave you that represents the remote sites IP address for their router Press Return If you selected Standard or Buffered as the Tx Injection Management type in the Frame Relay Configuration screen go to the next bulleted i
21. Downloading configuration files above This is useful for configuring a number of routers with identical parameters or for creating configuration backup files Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Router by Netopia or your network administrator The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or the WAN interface To upload a configuration file 1 Decide on a name for the file and a path for saving it 2 Select Receive Config from Netopia and press Return The following dialog box appears 11 12 Firmware User Guide Are you sure you want to save your current Netopia configuration If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without uploading the file or select CONTINUE to upload the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the configuration file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again Restarting the System You can restart the system by selecting the Restart System item in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen You must restart the system whenever you reconfigure the
22. ISP 1536 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lel NAT 192 163 100 6 Profile Name Lists the name of the connection profile being used if any Rate Shows the line rate for this connection Use Indicates the average percent utilization of the maximum capacity of the channels in use for the connection Remote Address Shows the IP address of the connected remote router Est Indicates whether the connection was locally Lcl or remotely Rmt established More Info Indicates the NAT address in use for this connection Status lights This section shows the current real time status of the Router s status lights LEDs It is useful for remotely monitoring the router s status The Quick View screen s arrangement of LEDs corresponds to the physical arrangement of LEDs on the router These LEDs and the corresponding display in the console menu screen will vary by model LED Status PWR ERROR ETHERNET DSL G Each LED representation can report one of four states The LED is off R The LED is red G The LED is green Y The LED is yellow The section Netopia Router status lights in the Getting Started Guide describes the meanings of the colors for each LED 9 4 Firmware User Guide Statistics amp Logs Main Menu Bm Statistics amp Logs When you are troubleshooting your Router the Statistics amp Logs screens provide insight into the recent event activities of the
23. Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 1 Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs IPsec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs See Virtual Private Networks VPNs on page 4 1 for more information The Version 5 3 firmware supports Internet Key Exchange IKE for secure encrypted communication over a VPN tunnel This chapter covers the following topics m Overview on page 5 1 m Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration on page 5 2 m Key Management on page 5 9 m IPsec WAN Configuration Screens on page 5 18 m IPsec Manual Key Entry on page 5 19 Overview IPsec supports two encapsulation modes Transport and Tunnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but leaves the header untouched Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPSec compliant device decrypts each packet Netopia Routers support Tunnel mode DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method DES uses a 56 bit key Netopia Routers offer IPsec 3DES triple DES encryption as a standard option Note Some models support built in hardware acceleration of 3DES encryption at line speeds The optional VPN accelerated models all 4652 models and 4522 routers
24. Line Encoding B8ZS Line Encoding B8ZS Framing Mode ESF Framing Mode ESF Number of DS0 Channels First DS0 Channel Number of DS0 Channels 1 1 1 First DSO Channel 1 Channel Data Rate Nx64k Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 PPP over Ethernet PPPOE off PPP over Ethernet PPPOE Off Data Circuit VPI 0 255 0 Data Circuit VCI 32 65535 35 TO MAIN MENU NEXT SCREEN TO MAIN MENU NEXT SCREEN eturn Enter goes to new screen eturn Enter goes to new screen nter Information supplied to you by your telephone company nter Information supplied to you by your telephone company WAN and System Configuration 2 9 Note If you used Easy Setup to configure your router you have already created a connection profile called Easy Setup Profile If you return to the Easy Setup menus and change the Data Link Encapsulation method you set up in this step the Easy Setup Data Link Encapsulation method will override this one and change the default data link encapsulation method in use You are now finished configuring the Line Configuration screen Press the Escape key to return to the WAN Configuration screen Note If you selected Frame Relay as your data link encapsulation method see Frame Relay Configuration on page 2 9 for more information Frame Relay Configuration If you chose Frame Relay as your data link encaps
25. Loopback Pattern Test The screen displays the current condition of tests that you run The counters display the occurrences of the indicated events in fifteen minute increments shifting the totals to the column to the right after each fifteen minute cycle until the total is accumulated in the 24 hours column Condition Displays the parameters tested Time columns Current time 00 00 starts at zero and resets to zero at 15 00 minutes shifting the counted total to the next column to its right 11 14 Firmware User Guide 24 hours Cumulative statistics for the preceding 24 hour period Line Status Conditions may be Normal Operation Red Alarm Yellow Alarm or Rmt Lcl LoopBack Loopback Status Current loopback condition Tests Offers a pop up menu with the following options Normal Clear Loopback clears any local loopbacks and sends an ANSI PLB clear to the remote CSU This returns the Netopia Router to its normal state if any testing has been done and the router has been put into a looped state Select this option after running tests to return the router to a normal state so that it is capable of passing traffic as it should Send Blue Alarm all 1s forces an error condition of all 1s remote will send a yellow alarm if enabled You can use this pattern in two different ways Once a remote router has been looped you can use it to verify that you are receiving the same data that you are sending For example if you send all one
26. To delete a circuit select Delete Circuit select a circuit from the pop up menu and press Return In the confirmation window select CONTINUE and press Return 6 Press Escape to return to the WAN Setup menu 2 20 Firmware User Guide Editing circuits You configure Virtual Circuits in the ATM Circuits Configuration screen From the Main Menu navigate to the ATM Circuits Configuration screen Main WAN i ATM Circuits Configuration Configuration ATM Circuits Configuration Show Change Circuit Add Circuit Delete Circuit Select Show Change Circuit and press Return WAN and System Configuration 2 21 Choosing Show Change Circuit or Delete Circuit displays a pop up menu that allows you to select the circuit to be modified or deleted ATM Circuits Configuration Circuit Name VPI VCI Show Change Circuit Circuit 1 Add Circuit Voice Circuit Delete Circuit Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Changing a circuit If you want to make any changes to the circuit you select you make them in the Change Circuit screen Change Circuit Circuit Name Circuit 1 Circuit Enabled Traffic Type Circuit VPI 0 255 Circuit VCI 0 65535 Connection Profile is Easy Setup Profile Circuit Name allows you to associate a one to fourteen character name with the circuit The default circuit name is Circuit lt n gt where lt n gt is
27. UPnP Enabled Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a set of protocols that allows a PC to automatically discover other UPnP devices anything from an internet gateway device to a light switch retrieve an XML description of the device and its services control the device and subscribe to real time event notification By default UPnP is enabled on the Netopia Gateway Security 10 3 For Windows XP users the automatic discovery feature places an icon representing the Netopia Gateway automatically in the My Network Places folder Be sure that the Windows XP service Universal Plug and Play Device Host is enabled and running otherwise you might not see the icon Double clicking the icon will launch a telnet window to your Gateway s Telnet interface PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateway s WAN IP address and automatically create NAT port maps This means that applications that support UPnP and are used with a UPnP enabled Netopia Gateway will not need application layer gateway support on the Netopia Gateway to work through NAT You can disable UPnP if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications Superuser configuration The access privileges of the Superuser account are not modifiable It is possible however to control who can log in as Superuser You can limit this to serial console only Select Superuser Configuration and press Return The Superuser Configuration screen appears Superuser Configuration Name 1
28. a 32 bit number that indicates which bits in an IP address are used for network and subnetwork addresses and which are used for host addresses One subnet mask should apply to all IP networks that are physically connected together and share a single assigned network number Subnet masks are often written in decimal notation like IP addresses but they are most easily understood in binary notation When a subnet mask is written in binary notation each numeral 1 indicates that the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network or subnet address Each O indicates that the corresponding bit is part of the host address The following table shows the proper subnet masks to use for each class of network when no subnets are required Class Subnet mask for a network with no subnets A Binary 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 0 0 0 B Binary 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 255 0 0 C Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Decimal 255 255 255 0 To know whether subnets are being used or not you must know what subnet mask is being used you cannot determine this information simply from an IP address Subnet mask information is configured as part of the process of setting up IP routers and gateways such as the Router Note If you receive a routed account from an ISP there must be a mask associated with your network IP address By using the IP address with the mask you can disco
29. agent m Details are given in Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP V2c on page 9 10 Security These screens allow you to add users and define passwords on your network m Details are given in Security on page 10 1 Upgrade Feature Set You can upgrade your Router by adding new feature sets through the Upgrade Feature Set utility See the release notes that came with your router or feature set upgrade or visit the Netopia Web site at www netopia com for information on new feature sets how to obtain them and how to install them on your Router 2 44 Firmware User Guide RFC 1483 Transparent Bridging This feature allows you to turn off the routing features and use your device as a bridge If you select this option the device will restart itself and reset all the settings to factory defaults Any configurations you have made will be erased Use this feature with caution If you decide to reinstate the routing capabilities you must reconfigure the device from scratch From the Main Menu select System Configuration System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Bridge Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Select Change Device to a Bridge and press Return Yo
30. all destination IP addresses Select Protocol Type and enter ICMP TCP UDP Any or the number of another IP transport protocol see the table on page 10 23 Note If Protocol Type is set to TCP or UDP the settings for port comparison that you configure in steps 8 and 9 will appear These settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP Select Source Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet s source port number Then select Source Port ID and enter the actual source port number to match on see the table on page 10 21 Select Dest Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet s destination port number Then select Dest Port ID and enter the actual destination port number to match on see the table on page 10 21 When you are finished configuring the filter select ADD THIS FILTER NOW to save the filter in the filter set Select CANCEL to discard the filter and return to the Add IP Filter Set screen Viewing filters To display a table of input or output filters select Display Change Input Filter or Display Change Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen Modifying filters To modify a filter select Display Change Input Filter or Display Change Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen Select a filter from the table and press Return The Change Filter screen appears The parameters in this screen are set in the same way a
31. ccccseeeeeneeneenes 2 2 SDSL IDSL Configuration SCreen csscssceseeeees 2 3 G SHDSL Line Configuration Screen cssceeee 2 6 T1 Line Configuration SCrEON ccscescssceseeeeeeeees 2 7 Frame Relay Configuration ccccscssessccsesseceeceseeseeesseoees 2 9 Frame Relay DLCI configuration 2 eeee 2 11 Multiple ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits cccceeeneees 2 16 Multiple ATM PVC OV rvVieW 0cceceececeeceeeeeeees 2 16 Multiple ATM PVC configuration cccscseeeneeeees 2 16 Gitte CIRCUS jcncecsccsneedsanaseteadanesteeanareenatacaeaitont 2 20 CHANGING Al OOU aeina ioa 2 21 Monitoring multiple virtual Circuits c cceeeeees 2 22 Creating a New Connection Profile eseeeeeeeees 2 24 The Default PROT sis ccieescshacgeine gaat enccxsceintareuaecanecteedes 2 28 IP parameters default profile Screen 006 2 29 Scheduled CONNECUONS esasen riena 2 29 Viewing scheduled connectionS s ssessesseseereeses 2 30 Adding a scheduled connection eeeeeeee 2 31 Set Weekly SChHedule sscsscssccssseccecssseesenees 2 32 Set Once Only Schedule cssceessscsecseeeesenees 2 33 Firmware User Guide Modifying a scheduled CONNECtION 0cceeeeees 2 34 Deleting a scheduled Connection csseeseeee 2 34 System Configuration SENS sci scdsccceteccacgtedevacswseacaeetads 2 35 System configuration features
32. or Add Connection Profile screen Main Menu The connection profile RIP Profile Parameters screen appears Display Change IP Profil r e RIP Profile or Add Parameters a Options Connection Profile WAN Configuration RIP Profile Parameters Receive RIP v2 MD5 Authentication Transmit RIP v2 MD5 multicast TX RIP Policy Poison Reverse RIP v2 Authentication Keys m Receive RIP is always visible Here you select Off v1 v2 Both vi and v2 or v2 MD5 Authentication from the pull down menu For MD5 authentication you must select v2 MD5 Authentication m If NAT is disabled Transmit RIP is visible Here you select Off v1 v2 broadcast v2 multicast v2 MD5 broadcast or v2 MD5 multicast from the pull down menu For MD5 authentication you must select v2 MD5 either broadcast or multicast m f you chose any Transmit RIP option other than Off TX RIP Policy is visible Here you select Poison Reverse Split Horizon or No Split Horizon from the pull down menu Unless otherwise instructed leave the default Poison Reverse m f either Receive RIP or Transmit RIP is set to v2 MD5 Authentication RIP v2 Authentication Keys is visible Selecting RIP v2 Authentication Keys takes you to the RIP v2 Authentication Keys screen where you can configure your keys in the same manner as in Adding a key on page 14 After configuring your key IP Setup 6 17 press COM
33. the time until either automatic Backup or Recovery m The FORCE BACKUP FORCE RECOVERY option is a selectable option that depending on the current state of backup will force the switching of ports If you are currently in backup mode the option will be FORCE RECOVERY If you are currently in normal WAN link mode the option will be FORCE BACKUP Selecting either one and pressing Return will force the link to switch to the other mode QuickView QuickView now has an information element to indicate which port is in use Quick View eq Memo 0 0 p 4 0 0 Current WAN Port Console Port t c Default IP Gateway 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 erne Domain Name happyint r Event Logs When a backup or recovery occurs an event is logged in the WAN Event History WAN Event History Current Date 8 17 02 10 57 12 AM 08 17 02 237 Line Failure Switching to backup port 08 17 02 Line Recovery Switching to primary port 08 17 02 42 Line Failure Switching to backup port 08 17 02 53 Device restarted 08 17 02 48 Device restarted 08 17 02 13 Device restarted 08 17 02 01 Device restarted 08 17 02 09 Device restarted 08 17 02 08 Device restarted 08 17 02 57 gt gt WAN ADSL 1 deactivated 08 17 02 756 gt gt WAN ADSL 1 activated at 10000 Kbps 08 17 02 07 Device restarted 08 17 02 45 Device restarted 08 17 02 Device restarted Clear History Return Enter on event item for details
34. 0 192 168 1 2 via router available to Customer Site A Usable IP Addresses available to 192 168 1 1 gt Customer Site A 192 168 1 1 gt 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 126 Customer Site B PC 2 Router B IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 130 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Remote IP 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 128 Remote Sub 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 2 Usable IP Addresses available to Customer Site B 192 168 1 129 gt 192 168 1 254 Gateway 192 168 1 129 Understanding IP Addressing B 5 Background The IP addresses and routing configurations for the devices shown in the diagram are outlined below In addition each individual field and its meaning are described The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields define the IP address and subnet mask of the device s Ethernet connection to the network while the Remote IP and Remote Sub fields describe the IP address and subnet mask of the remote router This information is entered in the connection profile of the Router The Gateway field describes the router or workstation s default gateway or where they will send their packets if the appropriate route is not known The Static Route field which is only shown on Router B tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Router B Finally the Usable IP Addre
35. 2 36 IP Address Serving on page 2 36 Network Address Translation NAT on page 2 36 Date and time on page 2 42 Stateful Inspection firewall on page 2 37 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Console Configuration on page 2 43 on page 2 43 Upgrade Feature Set on page 2 43 Security on page 2 43 Logging on page 2 46 RFC 1483 Transparent Bridging on page 2 44 To help you determine whether you need to use the system configuration options review the following requirements If you have one or more of these needs use the system configuration options described in later chapters m System configuration of dynamic IP address distribution through DHCP or BootP m Greater network security through the use of filters m Use of Network Time Protocol To access the system configuration screens select System Configuration in the Main Menu then press Return 2 36 Firmware User Guide The System Configuration menu screen appears System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Bridge Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup IP Setup These screens allow you to configure your network s use of the IP networking protocol m Detail
36. 5 4 offers DHCP Relay Agent functionality as defined in RFC1542 A DHCP relay agent is a computer system or a router that is configured to forward DHCP requests from clients on the LAN to a remote DHCP server and to pass the replies back to the requesting client systems When a DHCP client starts up it has no IP address nor does it know the IP address of a DHCP server Therefore it uses an IP broadcast to communicate with one or more DHCP servers These broadcasts are normally limited to the network segment on which the client is located and do not pass through routers such as the Netopia Router If the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP server it will assign the client an address from an address pool configured locally in the Netopia Router and respond to the client s request itself However if the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP relay agent it does not satisfy the DHCP request itself but instead forwards the request to one or more remote DHCP servers These servers process the request assign an address from an address pool configured on the remote server and forward the response back to the Netopia Router for delivery back to the client The agent then sends the response to the client on behalf of the DHCP server This process is transparent to the client which doesn t know that it is communicating through an intermediary rather than directly to a local server Using DHCP relay it is possible to centralize the confi
37. 6 6 Firmware User Guide If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets the IP Setup screen changes slightly IP Setup Subnet Configuration Default IP Gateway 192 128 117 163 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP v2 multicast Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen The IP address and Subnet mask items are hidden and the Define Additional Subnets item becomes Subnet Configuration If you select Subnet Configuration you will return to the IP Subnets screen that allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional Ethernet IP subnets Static routes Static routes are IP routes that are maintained manually Each static route acts as a pointer that tells the Router how to reach a particular network However static routes are used only if they appear in the IP routing table which contains all of the routes used by the Router see IP Routing Table on page 9 7 Static routes are helpful in situations where a route to a network must be used and other means of finding the route are unavailable For example static routes are useful when you cannot rely on RIP To go to the Static Routes screen select Static Routes in the IP Setup screen and press Return IP Setup 6 7 The Static Routes screen will appear Static Ro
38. 7 IP Routing Table Main Menu Statistics amp Logs gt e IP Routing Table The IP routing table displays all of the IP routes currently known to the Router IP Routing Table Network 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 Loopback 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 192 168 1 15 Ethernet 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 UPDATE The routing table screen represents a snapshot of the routing table information at the time the screen is first invoked To take a new snapshot select Update at the bottom of the screen and press Return General Statistics Main Menu e General Statistics Statistics amp Logs The General Statistics screen displays information about data traffic on the Router s data ports This information is useful for monitoring and troubleshooting your LAN Note that the counters roll over at their maximum field width that is they restart again at O 9 8 Firmware User Guide General Statistics Physical I F Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err Ethernet Hub 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 ATM ADSL 1 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 Network Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err IP 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 vc Traffic Statistics Physical Interface The top left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted for the followi
39. 9 7 H how to reach us A 4 l IDSL Line Configuration 2 5 IKE 5 1 input filter 3 10 32 input filters 1 and 2 10 32 input filters 4 and 5 10 32 Internet addresses see IP addresses Internet Key Exchange 5 1 Internet Key Exchange IKE 4 7 5 1 Internet Protocol IP 6 1 IP address serving 6 17 IP addresses B 1 about B 1 distributing B 5 distribution rules B 10 static B 8 IP passthrough 3 27 IP setup 6 2 IP trap receivers deleting 9 13 modifying 9 13 setting 9 13 viewing 9 13 IPsec 4 3 4 7 5 1 L latency 10 35 LED status 9 3 LEDs 9 3 line backup 7 1 backup IP gateway 7 15 connection profiles 7 7 management and statistics 7 10 7 16 scheduled connections 7 8 WAN configuration 7 2 7 3 M MIBs supported 9 10 model numbers 1 3 MPPE 4 10 MS CHAPv2 4 11 Multicast Forwarding 6 34 Multiple Data Link Encapsulation Set tings 2 25 multiple subnets 6 4 N NAT adding server lists 3 15 defined 6 1 Easy Setup Profile 3 6 Index 3 IP profile parameters 3 21 IP setup 3 7 map lists 3 8 modifying map lists 3 13 outside ranges 3 8 server lists 3 8 navigating Easy Setup 1 7 NCSA Telnet 1 4 nested IP subnets B 11 NetBIOS 6 22 NetBIOS scope 6 23 Netopia distributing IP addresses 6 17 B 5 models 1 3 monitoring 9 1 security 10 1 system utilities and diagnostics 11 1 Network Address Translation see NAT 6 1 network problems A 2 network status overview 9 1 o output filter 1 10 33 P packet header B 14 password to protec
40. Address Translation is a means of mapping one or more IP addresses and or IP service ports into different values This mapping serves two functions m lIt allows the addresses of many computers on a LAN to be represented to the public Internet by only one or a few addresses saving you money m lItcan be used as a Security feature by obscuring the true addresses of important machines from potential hackers on the Internet To help you understand some of the concepts discussed here it may be helpful to introduce some NAT terminology The term mapping refers to rules that associate one or more private addresses on the Netopia Router s LAN to one or more public addresses on the Netopia Routers WAN interface typically the Internet The terms private and internal refer to addresses on the Netopia Router s LAN These addresses are considered private because they are protected or obscured by NAT and cannot be directly accessed from the WAN or Internet side of the Netopia Router unless specifically configured otherwise The terms public and external refer to the WAN or Internet side of the Netopia Router 3 2 Firmware User Guide Features MultiNAT features can be divided into several categories that can be used simultaneously in different combinations on a per Connection Profile basis The following is a general description of these features Port Address Translation The simplest form of classic Network Address Translation is
41. Back in IP Address Serving the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients toggle More Address Serving Options The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 includes a number of enhancements in the built in DHCP IP address server These enhancements include The ability to exclude one or more IP addresses from the address serving pool so the addresses will not be served to clients The ability to reserve a particular IP address for a client with a particular Ethernet MAC address The ability to view the host name associated with a client to which the router has leased an IP address The ability for the router s Ethernet IP address es to overlap the DHCP address serving pool s The ability to serve as a DHCP Relay Agent The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports reserving an IP address only for a type 1 client identifier i e an Ethernet hardware address It does not support reserving an IP address for an arbitrary client identifier For more information on client identifiers see RFC 2131 section 9 14 IP Setup 6 25 Configuring the IP Address Server options To access the enhanced DHCP server functions from the Main Menu navigate to Statistics amp Logs and then Served IP Addresses Main Menu Served IP Statistics amp Logs Addresses The following example shows the Served IP Addresses screen after three clients have leased IP addresses The first client did not provide a Host Name in its DHCP messages the second and third cli
42. Connection Profile ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once Only basis m Toggle Scheduled Connection Enable to On m From the How Often pop up menu select Weekly and press Return m From the Schedule Type pop up menu accept the default Forced Up and press Return m Select Set Weekly Schedule and press Return The Set Weekly Schedule screen appears 7 10 Firmware User Guide Set Weekly Schedule Monday Yes Tuesday Yes Wednesday Yes Thursday Yes Friday Yes Saturday Yes Sunday Yes Scheduled Window Start Time 11 27 AM AM or PM Scheduled Window Duration Per Day 24 00 Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels m Toggle all the days of the week to Yes and set the Scheduled Window Duration Per Day to 24 00 This guarantees a 24X7 connection Press Escape to return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen m Select Use Connection Profile and press Return A screen displays all of your Connection Profiles Select the one you want to apply this scheduled connection to and press Return Your selection becomes effective Now if your primary WAN link fails the backup link will become active and remain active until the primary link recovers For more information about Scheduled Connections see Scheduled Connections on page 2 29 ManagemenvStatistics The Statistics amp Logs menu offe
43. DES the default or 3DES The Hash Algorithm pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 hash algorithm and may be either SHA1 the default or MD5 The Diffie Hellman Group pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 Diffie Hellman key exchange size and may be either Group 1 768 bits Group 2 1024 bits the default or Group 5 1536 bits If you select Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options the Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options screen appears Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options Negotiation Normal SA Use Policy Newest SAs Immediately Allow Dangling Phase 2 SAs Yes Phase 1 SA Lifetime seconds 28800 Phase 1 SA Lifetime Kbytes 0 Send Initial Contact Message Yes Include Vendor ID Payload Yes Independent Phase 2 Re keys Yes Strict Port Policy No Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Normally it is not necessary to change the settings of the items on the Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options screen Most of these settings exist for ensuring compatibility with remote IKE implementations that may have certain limitations The Negotiation pop up menu allows you to specify the way the device will respond to a connection attempt Normal the default is a two way mode Initiate Only or Respond Only permit limiting the connection to one way only The SA Use Policy pop up menu specifies the policy that the router will use to determine which Phase 1 SAs to use when multiple valid Phase 1 SAs are available for transmitting traffic on an IPsec
44. Exposed Address List from the pop up menu 2 40 Firmware User Guide Stateful Inspection Parameters Exposed Address List N Max TCP Sequ my _xposed_list lt lt None gt gt Enable defaul Deny Fragment Exposed Addre Up Down Arrows to select then Return Enter ESC to cancel Exposed Addresses You can specify the IP addresses you want to expose by selecting Add Exposed Address List and pressing Return The Add Exposed Address List screen appears Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address List Name my xposed addr list Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Add Edit or delete exposed addresses options are active only if NAT is disabled on an WAN interface The hosts specified in exposed addresses will be allowed to receive inbound traffic even if there is no corresponding outbound traffic WAN and System Configuration 2 41 Change Exposed Address Range my _xposed_list First Exposed Address 192 168 1 10 Last Exposed Address Protocol TCP and UDP TCP Port Start UDP Port End CHANGE EXPOSED ADDRESS RANGE Start Address Start IP Address of the exposed host range End Address End IP Address of the exposed host range Protocol Select the Protocol of the traffic to be allowed to the host range from the pull down menu Options are Any TCP UDP or TCP UDP Start Port Start port of the range to be allowed to the host range The acceptable r
45. IP Address Mask Protocol Type ADD THIS FILTER NOW CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Enter the packet specific information for this filter When you add or change an output filter and toggle Forward to Yes a new Call Placement Idle Reset pop up menu becomes visible Security 10 49 Add Output Filter Enabled Forward Call Placement Idle Reset No Change Disabled Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type ADD THIS FILTER NOW This pop up menu allows you to configure what action will be taken for packets that the filter rule specifies should be forwarded If you set Call Placement Idle Reset to No Change the default no change will be made to the call filtering attribute associated with the packet If no other filter rule with its Call Placement Idle Reset pop up set to Disabled previously has been or subsequently will be applied to the packet the packet will be forwarded as usual No special action will be taken If the connection is up the connection s idle timer will be refreshed and the packet forwarded as usual If the connection is down the packet is queued until a connection is established If you set the Call Placement Idle Reset to Disabled the call filtering attribute associated with the packet will be set such that the packet will be dropped if the connection is down and forwarded without resetting the idle tim
46. Network Address Translation screen Once the public ranges have been assigned the next step is to bind interior addresses to them Because these bindings occur in ordered lists called map lists you must first define the list then add mappings to it From the Network Address Translation screen select Add Map List and press Return The Add NAT Map List screen appears Add NAT Map List Map List Name my _map Add Map m Select Map List Name and enter a descriptive name for this map list A new menu item Add Map appears Multiple Network Address Translation 3 11 Select Add Map and press Return The Add NAT Map screen appears Add NAT Map my_map First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range ADD NAT MAP Select First and Last Private Address and enter the first and last interior IP addresses you want to assign to this mapping Select Use NAT Public Range and press Return A screen appears displaying the public ranges you have defined Add NAT Map my_map Public Address Range Type Name Easy PAT Select my first_rang 206 1 1 2 static my _second_range lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to cancel Return Enter to Delete From the list of public ranges you defined select the one that you want to map to the interior range for this 3 12 Firmware User Guide mapping and press Return If none of your preco
47. PPTP Tunnel Options screen If either the client or the server side specifies encryption then encryption becomes mandatory for both Netopia s ATMP implementation supports Data Encryption Standard DES data encryption for user data transfer over the ATMP tunnel between two Netopia routers The encryption option none or DES is a selectable option in the ATMP Tunnel Options screen Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 11 MS CHAP V2 and 128 bit strong encryption Notes m The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports 128 bit strong encryption when using PPTP tunnels ATMP does not have an option of using 128 bit MPPE If you are using ATMP between two Netopia routers you can optionally set 56 bit DES encryption m When you choose MS CHAP as the authentication method for a PPTP tunnel the Netopia router will start negotiating MS CHAPv2 If the router or VPN adapter client you are connecting to does not support MS CHAPv2 the Netopia router will fall back to MS CHAPv1 or if the router or VPN adapter client you are connecting to does not support MPPE at all the PPP session will be dropped This is done automatically and transparently ATMP PPTP Default Profile The WAN Configuration menu offers a ATMP PPTP Default Profile option Use this selection when your router is acting as the server for VPN connections that is when you are on the answering end of the tunnel establishment The ATMP PPTP Default Profile determines the way the attem
48. Password for non Superusers and provides access to the associated menu described previously IP Setup menu In the IP Setup menu users that do not have LAN Subnet Configuration access will see a screen similar to the following LAN IP Subnet is IP Setup 192 168 1 1 24 10 12 Firmware User Guide Utilities amp Diagnostics menu Based on access level the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram Global Global Global All Global All All Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Log off Serial Console Session Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP X Modem File Transfer Restart System Superuser X Modem File Transfer menu Based on access level the X Modem File Transfer menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram Global Global Global All All Statistics amp Logs menu end ICMP Echo Requests to a network host X Modem File Transfer Send Firmware to Netopia Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration Send Config to Netopia Send Configuration Receive Config from Netopia Revert to Factory Defaults Current Configuration The Statistics amp Logs menu shown below is a composite of all the possible options on all Netopia routers and IADs supported by the firmware Substantial differences exist among s
49. Profile first and then associate it with an existing Connection Profile m You can create a Connection Profile and then modify it to associate it with an existing IKE Phase 1 Profile m You can create a new Connection Profile and add a new IKE Phase 1 Profile as you go You can do this WAN Configuration menus Refer to Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 24 for instructions on creating a Connection Profile if you don t already know how to do that You can access the Key Management menus from the Change Connection Profile menu under the WAN Configuration screen for a Connection Profile you have already created Main Display Change Menu WAN Configuration Connection Profile or you can create a new Connection Profile with your IKE settings included as you go The IKE Key management settings are part of the Data Link Options that you specify in the Add Connection Profile or Change Connection Profile menus In this description it is assumed that you are changing an existing Connection Profile A Change Connection Profile screen is shown below Change Connection Profile Profile Name Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Telco Options 5 10 Firmware User Guide Note The Change Connection Profile screen will offer different options depending on the model of router you are using For a router with the Dial Backup feature y
50. Quick Menu IP Setup IP Address Serving Setup Filter Sets Static Routes Network Address Translation X Modem File Transfer Console Configuration TFTP his menu allows you to visit most configuration screens Note Console Configuration is always visible ATM Circuits Configuration menu You select ATM Circuits Configuration from the WAN Configuration menu Main ATM Circuits Menu WAN Configuration Configuration Security 10 15 The ATM Circuits Configuration menu screen appears as follows ATM Circuits Configuration Display Change WAN 1 Circuit Add WAN 1 Circuit Delete WAN 1 Circuit Display Change WAN 2 Circuit Add WAN 2 Circuit Delete WAN 2 Circuit Note Multiple ATM circuit configuration is supported on multiple ATM capable routers Although some of the parameters of the Circuit Configuration screens pertain to Voice and Connection Profiles it is assumed that if the user has been granted PVC configuration access they are permitted configuration access to all PVC parameters User Accounts When you first set up and configure the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 no passwords are required to access the configuration screens Anyone could tamper with the router s configuration by simply connecting it to a console However by adding user accounts you can protect the most sensitive screens from unauthorized access User accounts are composed of
51. RIP Profile Options m Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel About IPsec Tunnels IPsec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs See Overview on page 4 1 for more information IPsec supports two encryption modes Transport and Tunnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but leaves the header untouched The more secure Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPsec compliant device decrypts each packet Netopia Routers support the more secure Tunnel mode Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers IPSec 3DES encryption over the VPN tunnel DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method DES uses a 56 bit key Netopia Routers offer IPsec 3DES triple DES encryption as a standard option Some models support built in hardware acceleration of 3DES encryption at line speeds Internet Key Exchange IKE is an authentication and encryption key management protocol used in conjunction with the IPsec standard IPsec key management offers a wide variety of options which are explained in Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 4 8 Firmware User Guide About ATMP Tunnels To set up an ATMP tunnel you create a Connection Profil
52. Router Load these MIBs into your SNMP management software in the order they are listed here Follow the instructions included with your SNMP manager on how to load MIBs You can also obtain the latest updated SNMP MIBs from the Netopia anonymous FTP server FTP to ftp netopia com pub router snmpinfo Monitoring Tools 9 11 The SNMP Setup screen From the Main Menu select SNMP in the System Configuration screen and press Return The SNMP Setup screen appears System Configuration Main Menu SNMP SNMP Setup System Name System Location System Contact System Trap Version Read Only Community String Read Write Community String Authentication Traps Enable IP Trap Receivers Follow these steps to configure the first three items in the screen 1 2 3 4 Select System Name and enter a descriptive name for the Router s SNMP agent Select System Location and enter the router s physical location room floor building etc Select System Contact and enter the name of the person responsible for maintaining the router Select the SNMP Trap Version and choose either SNMP V1 or SNMP V2c SNMP V2c is a more feature rich version but is not supported by all vendors Consult with your service provider System Name System Location and System Contact set the values returned by the Router SNMP agent for the SysName SysLocation and SysContact objects respectively in the MIB Il s
53. Router and want the new parameter values to take effect Under certain circumstances restarting the system may also clear up system or network malfunctions Some configuration processes automatically restart the system to apply the changes you have made T1 Line Statistics and Diagnostics For T1 models the Utilities and Diagnostics menu includes an option for displaying T1 line statistics You access the Utilities and Diagnostics menu from the Main Menu T1 Line Statistics Main Utilities amp Diagnostics Diagnostics Menu Utilities and Diagnostics 11 13 Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP X Modem File Transfer Restart System Revert to Factory Defaults Tl Line Statistics Diagnostics Select T1 Line Statistics Diagnostics and press Return The T1 Line Statistics Diagnostics screen appears Tl Line Statistics Diagnostics Condition 00 16 00 27 00 12 1 57 1 42 24 hours Errored Seconds 007 Unavailable Seconds 006 Severely Errored Seconds 016 Bursty Errored Seconds 000 Loss of Frame Count 000 Bipolar Violation Count 000 Line Status Loopback Status 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 00000 000 000 000 00000 000 000 000 00000 000 000 000 00000 00000 00000 Normal Clear Loopback esent Send Blue Alarm all 1s Remote Payload Loopback Local Payload Loopback
54. Select Number of DSO Channels and enter the number of DSO channels that you and your telephone service provider have determined are necessary for your T1 line The default setting for DSO Channels is 1 one Press Return Note Each DSO channel represents a 56k or 64k increment in bandwidth Selecting a number less than the maximum of 24 specifies a fractional T1 interface For fractional T1 you can also specify in the check box whether the DSO channels are contiguous or alternating m Select First DSO Channel and enter the number of the first active DSO channel you will be using The 2 8 Firmware User Guide default setting is 1 one Press Return Note You can change the First DSO Channel number which has a valid range from one to the maximum number minus the number of active channels If the number of active DSO channels is 24 maximum First DSO Channel is hidden If you specify a number of DSO channels less than the maximum a Contiguous Channels item appears For fractional T1 you can specify whether the DSO channels are contiguous or alternating by toggling Contiguous Channels to Yes or No Select Buildout dB and press Return From the pop up menu highlight the line buildout which is the transmit attenuation of the line that you will be using The choices in the menu include Auto 0 0 6 7 5 15 0 22 5 and None The default setting is 0 0 6 Press Return If Automatic is chosen the attenuation of the transmission wil
55. Server List Easy Servers p ar Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Local WAN IP Address 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here If you select NAT Options in either case the NAT Options screen appears NAT Options IP Passthrough Enabled Toggle ON to allow local WAN IP address to be used on LAN in addition to NAT If you toggle IP Passthrough Enabled to Yes additional field s appear Multiple Network Address Translation 3 29 NAT Options IP Passthrough Enabled Yes IP Passthrough DHCP Enabled Yes IP Passthrough DHCP MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Enter MAC addr of IP passthrough host or zeroes for first come first serve Toggling IP Passthrough DHCP Enabled to Yes displays the IP Passthrough DHCP MAC address field This is an editable field in which you can enter the MAC hardware address of the designated PC be used as the DHCP Client Identifier for dynamic address reservation The MAC address must be six colon delimited or dash delimited sets of hex digits O FF First Come First Serve Mode Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 IP Passthrough allows a first come first serve mode NAT Options defaults to an all zeroes MAC address If you leave the default all zeroes MAC address the Router will select the ne
56. Set Date and Time menu under the System Configuration menus m The Start Time and End Time formats are determined by the System Time Format The AM or PM pull down menus do not appear if the time format is 24 hour time m The End Time Mode pull down menu allows you to select either Date or Infinite This determines whether or not the key will expire at a specified time and date or remain effective indefinitely End Date End Time and AM or PM do not appear if the End Time Mode is set to Infinite Infinite means that the key begins when it begins but it never expires The acceptable year range is from 1904 2039 m When you are satisfied with your entries select COMMIT and press Return This menu will not accept a non unique Key ID on the same interface failure to enter an authentication key or a negative start date end date or start time and end time range Changes to RIP Keys on all interfaces are immediately effective This differs from the remainder of the RIP configuration on the Ethernet LAN which requires a reboot It is important that the keys be able to change dynamically however because the purpose of entering more than one key on an interface is to insure a smooth transition between keys with no network outages IP Setup 6 15 Changing or deleting a key You change or delete a key by selecting it from a pop up menu In the RIP v2 Authentication Keys menu select Display Change Key RIP v2 Authentication Keys
57. This screen allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional subnets See IP subnets on page 6 4 for details IP Setup 6 3 The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports multiple IP subnets on the Ethernet interface You may want to configure multiple IP subnets to service more hosts than are possible with your primary subnet It is not always possible to obtain a larger subnet from your ISP For example if you already have a full Class C subnet your only option is multiple Class C subnets since it is virtually impossible to justify a Class A or Class B assignment If you are using NAT you can use the reserved Class A or Class B subnet Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a default gateway This can be the address of any major router accessible to the Router A default gateway should be able to successfully route packets when the Router doesn t know how to route to the intended recipient s IP address Typically a default gateway is the ISP s router If a backup gateway is available select Backup IP Gateway and enter the IP address of a gateway that you want to use for backup in the event of a connection failure See Backup Default Gateway on page 7 13 for configuration details Select Primary Domain Name Server and enter the IP address for a domain name server The domain name server matches the alphabetic addresses favored by people for example robin hood com to the IP addresses actually used
58. Version 3 114 m The Win3 1 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour m The Win3 1 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the user exits Windows and goes to DOS m The lease can be manually expired by typing IPCONFIG RELEASE from a DOS window within Windows or from the DOS prompt Macintosh workstation Open Transport Version 1 1 or later m The Mac workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour m The Mac workstation relinquishes its address upon shutdown in all but one case If the TCP IP control panel is set to initialize at startup and no IP services are used or the TCP IP control panel is not opened the DHCP address will NOT be relinquished upon shutdown However if the TCP IP control panel is opened or if an IP application is used the Mac WILL relinquish the lease upon shutdown m If the TCP IP control panel is set to acquire an address only when needed therefore a TCP IP application must have been launched to obtain a lease the Mac WILL relinquish its lease upon shutdown every time Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 DHCP server characteristics m The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 ignores any lease time associated with a DHCP request and automatically issues the DHCP address lease for one hour m The number of devices a Router can serve DHCP to is 512 This is imposed by global limits on the size of the address serving database which is shared by all address serving functions active in
59. by IP routers for example 163 7 8 202 If a secondary DNS server is available select Secondary Domain Name Server and enter its IP address The secondary DNS server is used by the Router when the primary DNS server is inaccessible Entering a secondary DNS is useful but not necessary Select Domain Name and enter your network s domain name for example netopia com Netopia strongly recommends that you enter a domain name Routing Information Protocol RIP is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Router needs to recognize If this is the case select RIP Options and press Return This will take you to the Ethernet LAN RIP options screen where you can configure several parameters including RIP v2 MD5 Authentication See RIP 2 MD5 Authentication on page 6 10 m With Receive RIP set to v1 the Ethernet port will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask Set to v2 the router will accept routing informa tion provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks Set to Both the router will accept information from either RIP v1 or v2 routers m With Transmit RIP v1 selected the router will generate RIP packets only to other RIP v1 routers With Transmit RIP v2 broadcast selected the router will generate RIP packets to all other hosts on the net work With Transmit RIP v2 multicast selected the router will g
60. capabilities Chapter 9 Monitoring Tools Monitoring Tools 9 1 This chapter discusses the Router s device and network monitoring tools These tools can provide statistical information report on current network status record events and help in diagnosing and locating problems This section covers the following topics Quick View Status Overview on page 9 1 Statistics amp Logs on page 9 4 Event Histories on page 9 4 IP Routing Table on page 9 7 General Statistics on page 9 7 System Information on page 9 9 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP V2c on page 9 10 Quick View Status Overview You can get a useful overall status report from the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 in the Quick View screen To go to the Quick View screen select Quick View in the Main Menu Main Menu y Quick View The Quick View screen has three status sections General status Current DSL Status LED Status 9 2 Firmware User Guide General status Quick View 10 11 2001 07 31 26 AM Default IP Gateway 0 0 CPU Load 4 Unused Memory 6044 KB Primary DNS Server 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 Domain Name Netopia com IP Address Ethernet Hub 00 00 c5 ff 70 00 192 168 1 1 ATM SDSL WAN 00 00 c5 ff 70 02 0 0 0 0 Current DSL Status Profile Name Rate Use Remote Address ISP 1536 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lcl NAT 192 163 100 6 VPN QuickView LED Status PWR ER
61. community string to the empty string will block SNMP Set Requests to the router but Get Requests and Get Next Requests will still be honored using the Read Only community string assuming that is not the empty string m Setting only the Read Only community string to the empty string will not block Get Requests or Get Next Requests since those operations and Set Requests are still allowed using the non empty Read Write community string Even if you decide not to use SNMP you should change the community strings This prevents unauthorized access to the Router through SNMP For more information on security issues see Suggested Security Measures on page 10 1 SNMP traps An SNMP trap is an informational message sent from an SNMP agent in this case the Router to a manager When a manager receives a trap it may log the trap as well as generate an alert message of its own Standard traps generated by the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 include the following m An authentication failure trap is generated when the router detects an incorrect community string in a received SNMP packet Authentication Traps Enable must be On for this trap to be generated m Acold start trap is generated after the router is reset m An interface down trap ifDown is generated when one of the router s interfaces such as a port stops functioning or is disabled m An interface up trap ifUp is generated when one of the router s interfaces such as a
62. displays the IP address and editable item in which you can enter an Ethernet MAC address The pop up dialog box includes OK and CANCEL buttons for confirming or cancelling the operation If the IP address is currently offered or leased to or reserved for a client you will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation Reserving an IP address guarantees that the IP address will only be leased IP Setup 6 29 Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 IP Address is 192 168 1 108 192 168 MAC Address 00 00 c5 45 89 ef 192 168 192 168 OK 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 Lease Management The router s Ethernet IP address es will be automatically excluded from the address serving pool s on startup Entries in the served IP address list corresponding to the router s Ethernet IP address es that have been automatically excluded on startup are not selectable Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 Excluded for the router s IP address 192 168 Excluded 192 168 DHCP 00 24 Barr s XPi 120 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 Lease Management Hit RETURN ENTER for available operations 6 30 Firmware User Guide DHCP Relay Agent The Netopia Firmware Version
63. format MM DD YY or MM DD YYYY month day year Note You must enter the date in the format specified The slashes are mandatory For example the entry 5 7 98 would be accepted as May 7 1998 The entry 5 7 would be rejected Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection Note You must enter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled connection Use the same format restrictions noted above You are finished configuring the once only options Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue In the Add Scheduled Connection screen select Use Connection Profile and choose from the list of connection profiles you have already created A scheduled connection must be associated with a connection profile to be useful The connection profile becomes active during the times specified in the associated scheduled connection if any exists Select ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION to save the current scheduled connection Select CANCEL to exit the
64. keys The keys are automatically and continually changing making the data exchanged using the keys inherently secure It also allows you to specify a lifetime for the IPsec Security Association and allows encryption keys to change periodically during IPSec sessions You can set this period for key generation to as often as your security requirements dictate A Security Policy Database SPD now defines the security requirements This is a significant change from earlier firmware implementations of IPsec Traffic with a source IP address that falls within the local member specification of an IPsec tunnel and that is addressed to a destination IP address that falls within the remote member specification of that tunnel is not routed using the normal routing table Instead it is forwarded using the security policy database to the remote security gateway remote tunnel endpoint specified in the IPsec tunnel configuration It is not possible to send traffic outside the tunnel by bypassing the tunnel and the remote security gateway Note To fully protect against IP address spoofing of local member addresses requires firewall rules to be installed on the WAN interface These must prevent packets coming in through that interface with local member source addresses since local member source addresses should only originate from the LAN Otherwise it is theoretically possible for a malicious hacker to send packets through the tunnel by impersonating local m
65. mapped to the first five corresponding private IP addresses 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 Add NAT Public Range Range Name Static Range Type static First Public Address 206 1 1 1 Last Public Address 206 1 1 5 ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE Return Enter to commit changes 3 34 Firmware User Guide Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return You are returned to the Network Address Translation screen Next select Show Change Map List and choose Easy PAT List Select Add Map The Add NAT Map screen appears Now the name Easy PAT List is a misnomer since it has a static map included in its list Enter in 192 168 1 1 for the First Private Address and 192 168 1 5 for the Last Private Address Add NAT Map Easy PAT List First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 5 Use NAT Public Range Select Use NAT Public Range and from the pop up menu choose Static Range Select ADD NAT MAP and press Return This will statically map the first five public IP addresses to the first five corresponding private IP addresses and will map 206 1 1 6 to the remaining private IP addresses using PAT Notes on the example The Easy Map List and the Easy PAT List are attached to any new Connection Profile by default If you want to use this NAT configuration on a previously defined Connection Profile then you need to bind the Map List to the profile You do this through either the NAT Associations screen or the profile
66. name password combinations that can be given to authorized users Caution You are strongly encouraged to add protection to the configuration screens Unprotected screens could allow an unauthorized user to compromise the operation of your entire network Once user accounts are created users who attempt to access protected screens will be challenged Users who enter an incorrect name or password are returned to a screen requesting a name password combination to access the Main Menu To set up user accounts in the System Configuration screen select Security and press Return The Security Options screen appears 10 16 Firmware User Guide Security Options Enable Telnet Console Access Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens Console Access timeout seconds Show Users Add User Delete User Advanced Security Options Password for This Screen 11 chars max Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Set up configuration access options here Protecting the Security Options screen The first screen you should protect is the Security Options screen because it controls access to the configuration screens Access to the Security Options screen can be protected with a password Select Password for This Screen in the Security Options screen and enter a password Make sure this password is secure and is different from any of the user account passwords Protecting the configuration screens You can protect th
67. not useful to apply a compare function on this portion of the control negotiation packets You must also set the firewall to allow inbound and outbound GRE packets Protocol 47 Internet Assigned Numbers Document RFC 1700 enabling transport of the tunnel payload From the Main Menu navigate to Display Change IP Filter Set and from the pop up menu select Basic Firewall Main Menu System Configuration Select Display Change Input Filter Display Change Input Filter screen Filter Sets Display Change Filter Set 2000 Yes No 6000 Yes No Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 23 Select Input Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 1 screen set the Destination Port information as shown below Change Input Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare Dest Port ID Established TCP Conns Only No Compare 0 Equal 1723 No Select Input Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Input Filter 2 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type 4 24 Firmware User Guide In the Display Change Filter Set screen select Display Change Output Filter Displa
68. of defaults and other parameters Your service provider should supply you with the appropriate information about the type and capabilities of the access concentrator equipment they use m Select Regional Setting and from the pop up menu select either Annex A or Annex B North American users select Annex A non North American users select Annex B m Select Cell Format and from the pop up menu select either Scrambled the default or Unscrambled This setting must match the format used by your service provider Scrambled is the most common so you probably do not need to change it unless your provider specifically tells you to do so m Select Unused Cell Format and from the pop up menu select either Idle the default or Empty This setting must match the format used by your service provider Idle is the most common so you probably do not need to change it unless your provider specifically tells you to do so Select Data Link Encapsulation and from the pop up menu choose your DLE m If you selected RFC1483 the next pop up menu RFC1483 Mode offers the choice of Bridged 1483 or Routed 1483 If you select Bridged 1483 a new option PPP over Ethernet PPPoE appears You can then toggle PPPoE On or Off Choosing Routed 1483 hides the PPPoE option m If you selected PPP the next pop up menu PPP Mode offers the choice of VC Multiplexed or LLC SNAP WAN and System Configuration 2 7 T1 Line Configuration screen The T1 Line Configuration screen
69. of routers from 1 to 15 between the sending router and the destination router The maximum number of routers on a packet s route is 15 Setting RIP Metric to 1 means that a route can involve 15 routers while setting it to 15 means a route can only involve one router m Select ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW to save the new static route or select CANCEL to discard it and return to the Static Routes screen m Upto 32 static routes can be created but one is always reserved for the default gateway which is configured using either Easy Setup or the IP Setup screen in system configuration Modifying a static route To modify a static route in the Static Routes screen select Display Change Static Route to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and go to the Change Static Route screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Static Route screen see Adding a static route on page 6 8 Deleting a static route To delete a static route in the Static Routes screen select Delete Static Route to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and press Return to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected static route press Escape Rules of static route installation The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 applies certain rules before installing enabled static routes in the IP routing table An enabled static route will not be installed in the IP routing table i
70. packet in the sequence of Ping packets is sent A count of the number of late packets appears in parentheses to the right of the Packets In count In the example that follows a Router is sending Ping packets to another host which responds with return Ping packets Note that the second return Ping packet is considered to be late because it is not received by the Router before the third Ping packet is sent The first and third return Ping packets are on time time send Ping packet 1 Netopia P receive Ping packet 1 host Netopia ag 2e e return Ping packet 1 j send Ping packet 2 Netopia receive Ping packet 2 send return Ping packet 2 os send Ping packet 3 Netopia pice SUE a Netopia receive return Ping packet 2 11 4 Firmware User Guide Packets Lost The number of packets unaccounted for shown in total and as a percentage of total packets sent This statistic may be updated during the Ping test and may not be accurate until after the test is over However if an escalating one to one correspondence is seen between Packets Out and Packets Lost and Packets In is noticeably lagging behind Packets Out the destination is probably unreachable In this case use STOP PING Round Trip Time Min Max Avg Statistics showing the minimum maximum and average number of seconds elapsing between the time each Ping packet was sent and the time its corresponding return Ping packet was received The time to
71. port begins functioning The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 sends traps using UDP for IP networks You can specify which SNMP managers are sent the IP traps generated by the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 Up to eight receivers can be set You can also review and remove IP traps Monitoring Tools 9 13 To go to the IP Trap Receivers screen select IP Trap Receivers The IP Trap Receivers screen appears IP Trap Receivers Display Change IP Trap Receiver Add IP Trap Receiver Delete IP Trap Receiver Return Enter to modify an existing Trap Receiver Navigate from here to view add modify and delete IP Trap Receivers Setting the IP trap receivers 1 Select Add IP Trap Receiver 2 Select Receiver IP Address or Domain Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the SNMP manager you want to receive the trap 3 Select Community String if you enabled one in the SNMP Setup screen and enter the appropriate password 4 Select Add Trap Receiver Now and press Return You can add up to seven more receivers Viewing IP trap receivers To display a view only table of IP trap receivers select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen Modifying IP trap receivers 1 To edit an IP trap receiver select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 In the Change IP Trap Receiver screen edit the information as needed a
72. remote loop code to the router to put it into a looped state You can simply put it into loopback manually and see if that loop is reflected at the remote side Loopback Pattern Test sends continuous 1200 byte packets and compares incoming packets similar to ISDN loopback tests counting good and bad packets Twenty consecutive good packets are required to PASS The loopback testing screen is only visible when this test is selected It sends a pseudo random sequence that is intended to simulate data so that you can check for errors on the circuit This test requires that the remote CSU be in a payload loopback condition It will partially work if the remote CSU is in a LINE loopback condition as well but this is less reliable When you select one of these tests and press Return the test runs and the screen provides feedback Troubleshooting A 1 Appendix A Troubleshooting This appendix is intended to help you troubleshoot problems you may encounter while setting up and using the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 It also includes information on how to contact Netopia Technical Support Important information on these problems can be found in the event histories kept by the Router These event histories can be accessed in the Statistics amp Logs screen This section covers the following topics m Configuration Problems on page A 1 m How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults on page A 3 m Power Outages on page A 3 m
73. router From the Main Menu go to Statistics amp Logs and select one of the options described in the sections below Event Histories Main oe Bs e WAN Event History Menu gt Statistics amp Logs e Device Event History The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories Event histories are useful for diagnosing problems because they list what happened before during and after a problem occurs You can view two different event histories one for the router s system and one for the WAN Some Netopia Routers have a built in battery backup which prevents loss of event history from a shutdown or reset The router s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first and to make it easy to distinguish error messages from informational messages Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk Both the WAN Event History and Device Event History retain records of the 128 most recent events In the Statistics amp Logs screen select WAN Event History or Device Event History Monitoring Tools 9 5 WAN Event History The WAN Event History screen lists a total of 128 events on the WAN The most recent events appear at the top WAN Event History Current Date 10 11 2001 03 02 23 PM 07 03 98 IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 03 98 7 Channel 1 up 07 03 98 data link activated at 1040 Kbps 07 03 98 Device restarted 07 03 98 Device re
74. some number between one and eight corresponding to the circuit s position in the list of up to eight circuits 2 22 Firmware User Guide Circuit Enabled allows you to enable or disable the circuit using the Tab key The default is enabled Traffic Type allows you to select which type of traffic will be routed on this circuit Voice or Data If you choose Voice the Connection Profile is field becomes unavailable and does not display Circuit VPI allows you to specify the Virtual Path Identifier VPI value for the circuit The default VPI value for both ADSL and cell based DSL is zero 0 Circuit VCI allows you to specify the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI value for the circuit The default VCI value depends on the type of DSLAM to which you are connecting m Accessing the Connection Profile Is field in the Change Circuit menu depends not on the number of Connection Profiles you have created but the number of data VCs you have added See Multiple ATM PVC configuration on page 2 16 If you have more than one data VC you can choose how Connection Profiles are associated with VCs otherwise you get default behavior and the Connection Profile Is field cannot be selected Monitoring multiple virtual circuits The General Statistics screen adds a selection for ATM VC Statistics To access the ATM VC Statistics screen navigate from the Main Menu to Statistics amp Logs then General Statistics Main Statistics Gener
75. the address is put at the head of an available list If an interior host needs an exterior address an hour later and the previously used address is still available it will acquire the same address If an interior host that has not previously been allocated an exterior address needs one it will be allocated the last hence the oldest exterior address on the available list All NAT configurations are rule based This means that traffic passed through NAT from either the public or the private network is compared to the rules and mappings configured in the Netopia Router in a particular order The first rule that applies to the traffic being initiated is used For example if a connection is initiated from the public network and is destined for a public IP address configured on the Netopia Router the following comparisons are made in this order 1 The Netopia Router first checks its internal NAT cache to see if the data is part of a previously initiated connection if not 2 The Netopia Router checks the configured server lists to see if this traffic is intended to be forwarded to an internal host based on the type of service 3 The Netopia Router then checks to see if there is a static dynamic or PAT mapping for the public IP address that the connection is being initiated to 4 The Netopia Router answers the request itself if the data is destined for the Netopia s WAN interface IP address Otherwise the data is discarded Multiple N
76. the following 1 Double click the My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop Open the Dial Up Networking folder You will see the icon for the profile you created in the previous section Right click the icon and from the pop up menu select Properties In the Properties window click the Server Type button From the Type of Dial up Server pull down menu select the appropriate type of server for your system version Server Types 1 21 x Type of Dial Up Server r Advanced options T Log on to network I Enable software compression I Require encrypted password Allowed network protocols T NetBEUI I IPX SPX Compatible M ICPAP TCP IP Settings omea m Windows 95 users select PPP Windows 95 Windows NT 3 5 Internet m Windows 98 users select PPP Windows 98 Windows NT Server Internet In the Allowed network protocols area check TCP IP and uncheck all of the other checkboxes Note Netopia s PPTP implementation does not currently support tunnelling of IPX and NetBEUI protocols Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 17 Click the TCP IP Settings button TCP IP Settings 12 x Server assigned IP address Specify an IP address Paddress Server assigned name server addresses Specify name server addresses Eimar DONG ae a Secondary DHS 0 0 0 0 IV Use IP header compression IV Use default gateway on remote network og Ca
77. the range type select Public Address and enter the exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select First and Last Public Port and enter the first and last exterior ports in the range These are the ports that will be used for traffic initiated from the private LAN to the out side world Note For PAT map lists and server lists if you use the Public Address 0 0 0 0 the list will acquire its public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection Profile If that is a static IP address then the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address If it is a negotiated IP address such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address each time it is negotiated m f you choose dynamic as the range type a new menu item First Public Address becomes visible Select First Public Address and enter the first exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select Last Public Address and enter an IP address at the end of the range m f you choose static as the range type a new menu item First Public Address becomes visible 3 10 Firmware User Guide Select First Public Address and enter the first exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select Last Public Address and enter an IP address at the end of the range m Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return The range will be added to your list and you will be returned to the
78. the router B 8 Firmware User Guide m The Router releases the DHCP address back to the available DHCP address pool exactly one hour after the last heard lease request Some other DHCP implementations may hold on to the lease for an additional time after the lease expired to act as a buffer for variances in clocks between the client and server MaclIP serving Macintosh workstation MacTCP or Open Transport Once the Mac workstation requests and receives a valid address the Router actively checks for the workstation s existence once every minute m For a dynamic address the Router releases the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 2 minutes m Fora static address the Router releases the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 20 minutes Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 MacIP server characteristics The Mac workstation uses ATP to both request and receive an address from the Router s MacIP server Once acquired NBP confirm packets will be sent out every minute from the Router to the Mac workstation Manually distributing IP addresses If you choose to manually distribute IP addresses you must enter each computer s address into its TCP IP stack software Once you manually issue an address to a computer it possesses that address until you manually remove it That s why manually distributed addresses are called static addresses
79. this packet will not be forwarded Example 5 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 255 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 96 200 1 1 96 01100000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 10 44 Firmware User Guide 255 255 255 255 11111111 Perform the logical AND 01100000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule does match and this packet will not be forwarded This rule masks off a single IP address Configuration Management Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers a Configuration Management feature Configuration Management provides a way to store several router configurations in a single device for use at different times This feature is supported on all models that support the version 5 4 firmware except the 4752 IAD You can store up to three configurations in the router s memory in addition to the currently running configuration The current configuration is the one currently booted from and is updated whenever there is a change to the router logged events parameter changes Other configurations are stored along with the current configuration Whenever you choose you can reboot into one of these configurations the copy of which becomes the current configurat
80. to see whether a particular IP destination is reachable from the Router You can also ascertain the quality and reliability of the connection to the desired destination by studying the Ping test s statistics In the Utilities amp Diagnostic screen select Ping and press Return The ICMP Ping screen appears ICMP Ping Name of Host to Ping Packets to Send Data Size Delay seconds START PING Status Packets Out 0 Packets In 0 Packets Lost 0 0 Round Trip Time Min Max Avg 0 000 0 000 0 000 secs Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host to ping Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host To configure and initiate a Ping test follow these steps 1 2 Select Name of Host to Ping and enter the destination domain name or IP address Select Packets to Send to change the default setting This is the total number of packets to be sent during the Ping test The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from 1 to 4 294 967 295 Select Data Size to change the default setting This is the size in bytes of each Ping packet sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from O only header data to 1664 Select Delay seconds to change the default setting The delay in seconds determines the time between Ping packets sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from O to 4 294 967 A d
81. twice to return to the Main Menu IP Setup screen To configure the backup gateway from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup System IP Configuration Setup Main Menu The IP Setup screen appears The IP Setup screen permits entry of a backup IP gateway address This field is always visible even if the Default IP Gateway field is not filled out as in the case of a DHCP acquired IP address and default gateway on the WAN interface IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Defa P Catewav Backup IP Gateway exap Bere cs erver Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name Receive RIP Transmit RIP Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen For more information on IP Setup see the IP Setup on page 6 2 Note Backup and Recovery have resolutions of five seconds This is how often the router evaluates the state of the connections and makes decisions 7 16 Firmware User Guide Backup Managemenv Statistics If backup is enabled the Statistics amp Logs menu offers a Backup Management Statistics option To view Backup Management Statistics from the Main Menu select Statistics amp Logs then Backup Management Statistics and press Return
82. whose model number ends in XL accelerate IPsec encryption and authentication Internet Key Exchange IKE is an authentication and encryption key management protocol used in conjunction with the IPsec standard IKE is a two phase protocol for key exchange m Phase 1 authenticates the security gateways and establishes the Security Parameters SPs they will use to negotiate on behalf of the clients Security Associations SAs are sets of information values that allow 5 2 Firmware User Guide the two devices on the Internet to communicate securely m Phase 2 establishes the tunnel and provides for secure transport of data IPsec can be configured without IKE but IKE offers additional features flexibility and ease of configuration Key exchange between your local router and a remote point can be configured either manually or by using the key exchange protocol The advantage of using IKE is that it automatically negotiates IPsec Security Associations and enables IPsec secure communications without having to manually enter the lengthy encryption keys at both ends of the connection You enter a human readable pass phrase or shared secret English sentence like my dog has fleas on each end once This pass phrase is used to authenticate each end to the other Thereafter the two ends periodically use a public key encryption method called Diffie Hellman to exchange key material and then securely generate new authentication and encryption
83. you may want to reassign them to different interface controlling profiles for example Connection Profiles To permit easy access to this IP Setup functionality you can use the NAT Associations screen You access the NAT Associations screen from the Network Address Translation screen Main Menu gt System Configuration IP Setup a Network Address Translation Select NAT Associations and press Return The NAT Associations screen appears Profile Interface Name Default Answer Profile Easy Setup Profile Profile 01 Profile 02 Profile 03 NAT Associations Nat Map List Name my first _map Easy PAT my_second_map my first_map lt lt None gt gt On On On On On Server List Name my servers my servers my servers my server list lt lt None gt gt m You can toggle NAT On or Off for each Profile Interface name You do this by navigating to the NAT field associated with each profile using the arrow keys Toggle NAT on or off by using the Tab key m You can reassign any of your map lists or server lists to any of the Profile Interfaces You do this by navigating to the Map List Name or Server List Name field associated with each profile using the arrow 3 26 Firmware User Guide keys Select the item by pressing Return to display a pop up menu of all of your configured lists NAT Associations NAT Map List Name Profile Interface Name Server List Name Ea
84. 1111010 27 11011 59 111011 91 1011011 123 1111011 28 11100 60 111100 92 1011100 124 1111100 29 11101 61 111101 93 1011101 125 1111101 30 11110 62 111110 94 1011110 126 1111110 31 11111 63 111111 95 1011111 127 1111111 C 2 Firmware User Guide Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 128 10000000 160 10100000 192 11000000 224 11100000 129 10000001 161 10100001 193 11000001 225 11100001 130 10000010 162 10100010 194 11000010 226 11100010 131 10000011 163 10100011 195 11000011 227 11100011 132 10000100 164 10100100 196 11000100 228 11100100 133 10000101 165 10100101 197 11000101 229 11100101 134 10000110 166 10100110 198 11000110 230 11100110 135 10000111 167 10100111 199 11000111 231 11100111 136 10001000 168 10101000 200 11001000 232 11101000 137 10001001 169 10101001 201 11001001 233 11101001 138 10001010 170 10101010 202 11001010 234 11101010 139 10001011 171 10101011 203 11001011 235 11101011 140 10001100 172 10101100 204 11001100 236 11101100 141 10001101 173 10101101 205 11001101 237 11101101 142 10001110 174 10101110 206 11001110 238 11101110 143 10001111 175 10101111 207 11001111 239 11101111 144 10010000 176 10110000 208 11010000 240 11110000 145 10010001 177 10110001 209 11010001 241 11110001 146 10010010 178 10110010 210 11010010 242 11110010 147 10010011 1
85. 1483 ATMP PPTP IPsec or L2TP Multiple Data Link Encapsulation Settings 4 Select Encapsulation Options and press Return WAN and System Configuration 2 25 2 Ifyou selected ATMP PPTP L2TP or IPSec see Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs 2 Ifyou selected PPP or RFC1483 the screen offers different options Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type Pein RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 Routed 1483 IP Profile Parameters COMMIT CANCEL Ifyou selected RFC1483 the screen allows you to choose Bridged 1483 or Routed 1483 Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Underlying Encapsulation None PPP Mode vc Multiplexed Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary COMMIT CANCEL onfigure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit Ifyou selected PPP the screen allows you to choose PPPoE or None as the Underlying Encapsulation Ifyou choose None the PPP Mode offers the choice of VC Multiplexed or LLC SNAP If you are using PPP when you select Encapsulation Options the Datalink PPP MP Options screen appears RFC1483 does not require these options and does not offer the menu selection 2 26 Firmware User Guide Datalink PPP MP Options Datalink PPP MP Options Data Compression Stand
86. 2000 6000 N A 1023 1023 N A Basic Firewall s filters play the following roles Input filters 1 and 2 These block WAN originated OpenWindows and X Windows sessions Service origination requests for these protocols use ports 2000 and 6000 respectively Since these are greater than 1023 OpenWindows and X Windows traffic would otherwise be allowed by input filter 4 Input filters 1 and 2 must precede input filter 4 otherwise they would have no effect since filter 4 would have already forwarded OpenWindows and X Windows traffic Input filter 3 This filter explicitly forwards all WAN originated ICMP traffic to permit devices on the WAN to ping devices on the LAN Ping is an Internet service that is useful for diagnostic purposes Input filters 4 and 5 These filters forward all TCP and UDP traffic respectively when the destination port is greater than 1023 This type of traffic generally does not allow a remote host to connect to the LAN using one of the potentially intrusive Internet services such as Telnet FTP and WWW Security 10 33 Output filter 1 This filter forwards all outgoing traffic to make sure that no outgoing connections from the LAN are blocked Basic Firewall is suitable for a LAN containing only client hosts that want to access servers on the WAN but not for a LAN containing servers providing services to clients on the WAN Basic Firewall s general strategy is to explicitly forward WAN originated TCP a
87. 4 Firmware User Guide 5 Select ADD PROFILE NOW and press Return Your new connection profile will be added If you want to view the connection profiles in your router return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Display Change Connection Profile The list of connection profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop up screen WAN Configuration IP Address Easy Setup Profile 127 0 0 2 Profile 1 0 0 0 0 Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Multicast Forwarding Multicast is a method for transmitting large amounts of information to many but not all hosts over an Internet One common use is to distribute real time audio and video to the set of hosts which have joined a distributed conference Multicast is similar to radio or TV broadcasts in the sense that only those who have tuned in to a particular frequency receive the information You see and hear the channel you are interested in but not the others Since a router should not be used as a passive forwarding device Netopia routers use a protocol for forwarding multicasting This protocol is Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Two versions of IGMP are available V1 and V2 Netopia routers can use either one however Multicast Forwarding will only work if your service provider supports it Check with your service provider You configure Multicast Forwarding in two console menu screens m First you enable Multicast Forwarding in the IP Se
88. 79 10110011 211 11010011 243 11110011 148 10010100 180 10110100 212 11010100 244 11110100 149 10010101 181 10110101 213 11010101 245 11110101 150 10010110 182 10110110 214 11010110 246 11110110 151 10010111 183 10110111 215 11010111 247 11110111 152 10011000 184 10111000 216 11011000 248 11111000 153 10011001 185 10111001 217 11011001 249 11111001 154 10011010 186 10111010 218 11011010 250 11111010 155 10011011 187 10111011 219 11011011 251 11111011 156 10011100 188 10111100 220 11011100 252 11111100 157 10011101 189 10111101 221 11011101 253 11111101 158 10011110 190 10111110 222 11011110 254 11111110 159 10011111 191 10111111 223 11011111 255 11111111 Index A add static route 6 8 ADSL Line Configuration 2 2 advanced configuration features 2 35 ATMP 4 10 tunnel options 4 8 B backup default gateway 7 13 backup line 7 1 basic firewall 10 32 BootP 6 17 clients 6 23 broadcasts B 14 Cc change static route 6 9 community strings 9 12 configuration troubleshooting PC A 1 configuration files downloading with TFTP 11 8 downloading with XMODEM 11 11 uploading with TFTP 11 9 uploading with XMODEM 11 11 Configuration Management 10 44 configuration screens protecting 10 16 configuring with console based management 1 2 2 1 Index 1 configuring terminal emulation software 1 4 configuring the console 2 43 Connection profiles 2 24 console configuring 2 43 connection problems A 2 console con
89. 9 characters max admin Password Telnet Access Enabled Web Access Enabled ADD SUPERUSER m Assign a Superuser Name It can be up to 19 characters long It is good practice not to use any easily guessed combination such as your birthday Assign a Password Keep this password secure If you lose or forget it you will not be able to access the router without factory defaulting it thereby losing all of your configuration information m You can disable Telnet or Web Access This may be useful for extra security in preventing remote attempts to access the router Select ADD SUPERUSER and press Return The Superuser account is now configured You will be challenged for this name and password every time you attempt to log into the router 10 4 Firmware User Guide Limited user configuration The Add Access Name Password and Show Change Access Name Passwords screens allow you to select which configuration features a limited non Superuser user can access From the Security Options screen select Add Access Name Password The Add Access Name Password screen appears Add Access Name Password Name 19 characters max Password kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Telnet Access Enabled Web Access Enabled Access Privileges ADD USER m Assign a User Name and Password and enable or disable Telnet and Web access as in the Superuser Configuration screen m Select Access Privileges and from the pull down menu choose which acce
90. 98 or NT no additional client software is required m Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol ATMP is the protocol that is implemented in many Ascend routers ATMP is a simple protocol for connecting nodes and or networks together over the Internet via a tunnel ATMP encapsulates IP or other user data without PPP headers within General Routing Encapsulation GRE Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 3 protocol over IP ATMP is more efficient than PPTP for network to network tunnels m Psec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs IPsec supports two encryption modes Transport and Tunnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but leaves the header untouched The more secure Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPSec compliant device decrypts each packet The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports the more secure Tunnel mode DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method DES uses a 56 bit key The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers IPSec DES encryption over the VPN tunnel When used to initiate the tunnelled connection the Router is called a PPTP Access Concentrator PAC in PPTP language or a foreign agent in ATMP language When used to answer the tunnelled connection the Netopia Router is called a PPT
91. A IKE port 500 Set to Yes the router will listen only to port 500 and source its packets from port 500 Set to No the router will return traffic to whatever port originated it 5 8 Firmware User Guide Changing an IKE Phase 1 Profile Selecting Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile or Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile displays an IKE Phase 1 profile pop up menu listing the names of all currently defined IKE Phase 1 profiles IPsec Configuration IKE Phasel Profile IKE Profile 2 1 Profile Arthropods Anthropoids ese Anopheles Albigensians Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Selecting Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile and choosing an IKE phase 1 profile name from the pop up list displays the Change IKE Phase 1 Profile screen This screen is identical to the Add IKE Phase 1 Profile screen shown above Selecting Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile and choosing an IKE phase 1 profile name from the pop up list displays a confirmation alert asking you to confirm that you really want to delete the specified IKE phase 1 profile IPsec Configuration IKE Phasel Profile Display Add IKE Netopia Are you sure you want to delete this IKE Phase 1 Profile CONTINUE Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 9 Key Management You specify your IKE key management on a per Connection Profile basis You can do this in one of three ways m You can create your IKE Phase 1
92. Add Scheduled Connection screen without saving the new scheduled connection 2 34 Firmware User Guide Modifying a scheduled connection To modify a scheduled connection select Display Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and press Return The Change Scheduled Connection screen appears The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Scheduled Connection screen except that ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION and CANCEL do not appear To find out how to set them see Adding a scheduled connection on page 2 31 Deleting a scheduled connection To delete a scheduled connection select Delete Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and press the Return key to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected scheduled connection press the Escape key WAN and System Configuration 2 35 System Configuration Screens System configuration features The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 default settings may be all you need to configure your Router Some users however require advanced settings or prefer manual control over the default selections For these users Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 provides system configuration options IP Setup on page 2 36 Filter Sets on page
93. Config HappyInternet Send Configuration lt Empty gt Type Name Receive Config from Netopia Jp Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit 10 48 Firmware User Guide Call Filtering Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports a call filtering mechanism that lets you control which packets cause connections to be established and which packets cause connections to be maintained that is to not time out due to inactivity This feature is part of the Filter Set management component of the firmware Call filtering makes use of the existing sets of filter rules that can be associated with a connection The term connection includes both non VPN connection profiles for which the remote network is reached through a switched WAN interface such as Analog or ISDN and all VPN connection profiles such as ATMP PPTP and IPsec The call filtering mechanism is useful if you have a time limited type of connection Such a connection may time out during a period of inactivity and may you want it to be re established or maintained automatically for certain types of traffic You manage Filters and Filter Sets in the Filter Sets management screen under the System Configuration menus Main Menu 7 System Configuration Filter Sets The Add Output Filter menu appears as follows Add Output Filter Enabled Yes Forward Yes Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest
94. DHCP server simplifying setup of each machine The second called BootP also known as Bootstrap Protocol is the predecessor to DHCP and allows older IP hosts to obtain most of the information that a DHCP client would obtain However in contrast BootP address assignments are permanent since there is no lease renewal mechanism in BootP The third protocol called Dynamic WAN is part of the PPP MP suite of wide area protocols used for WAN connections It allows remote terminal adapters and NAT enabled routers to be assigned a temporary IP address for the duration of their connection Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time make sure that the addresses distributed by the Router and those that are manually configured are not the same Each method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw from 6 18 Firmware User Guide Go to the System Configuration screen Select IP Address Serving and press Return The IP Address Serving screen will appear IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode Disabled DHCP Server Number of Client IP Addresses DHCP Relay Agent lst Client Address Client Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Serve DHCP Clients Yes DHCP Lease Time Hours 1 DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Follow these steps to configure IP Address Serving If you enabled IP Address Serving then DHCP BootP clients and Dynamic WAN cl
95. FC1483 ATMP PPTP m From the Encapsulation Type pop up menu select IPsec m Then select Encapsulation Options The IPsec Tunnel Options screen appears IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP Encryption Transform ESP Authentication Transform Compression Type Advanced IPsec Options COMMIT IKE ESP DES HMAC MD5 96 None 5 3 5 4 Firmware User Guide For Key Management you can use either IKE or Manual If you choose Manual skip to IPSec Manual Key Entry on page 5 19 If you choose IKE the default continue below m Select IKE Phase 1 Profile and press Return IKE Phasel Profile lt lt ADD PH1 PROFILE gt gt lt lt NONE gt gt Key Management IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP Encryption Tran ESP Authentication Compression Type Advanced IPsec Opti Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m A pop up window displays a list of IKE Phase 1 Profiles that you have configured If you have not previously configured an IKE Phase 1 Profile the selection ADD PH1 PROFILE allows you to do that now Adding an IKE Phase 1 Profile IKE Phase 1 Profiles contain the information that the two ends of a tunnel use to authenticate each other and the parameters that govern the public key cryptography exchanges that are required to generate new keys periodically Make sure to add an IKE P
96. I multiple DLCIs etc can be configured If you choose to run the router in bridged mode and select Frame Relay as the data link encapsulation method in the WAN Wide Area Network Setup menu the WAN Configuration menu now offers options to configure Frame Relay and Frame Relay DLCIs 2 46 Firmware User Guide Logging You can configure a UNIX compatible syslog client to report a number of subsets of the events entered in the router s WAN Event History See WAN Event History on page 9 5 Select Logging from the System Configuration menu The Logging Configuration screen appears WAN Log Log Log Log Log Logging Configuration Event Log Options Boot and Errors Line Specific Connections PPP DHCP CNA IP Syslog Parameters Syslog Enabled No Hostname or IP Address Facility Local 0 By default all events are logged in the event history By toggling each event descriptor to either Yes or No you can determine which ones are logged and which are ignored You can enable or disable the syslog client dynamically When enabled it will report any appropriate and previously unreported events You can specify the syslog server s address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up to 63 characters You can specify the UNIX syslog Facility to use by selecting the Facility pop up Erase the log by selecting DUMP WAN LOG WAN and System Configuration 2 47 You will need to install a Sysl
97. IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID Established TCP Conns Only No ADD THIS FILTER NOW 2 To make the filter active in the filter set select Enabled and toggle it to Yes If Enabled is toggled to No the filter can still exist in the filter set but it will have no effect 10 30 Firmware User Guide 3 4 10 11 If you want the filter to forward packets that match its criteria to the destination IP address select Forward and toggle it to Yes If Forward is toggled to No packets matching the filter s criteria will be discarded Select Source IP Address and enter the source IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet or a host address Select Source IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the source IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on the source address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on all source IP addresses or enter 255 255 255 255 to match the source IP address exclusively Select Dest IP Address and enter the destination IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet or a host address Select Dest IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the destination IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on the destination address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on
98. IP address supplied by the Router will be a unique number You may want to replace this number with a number that your ISP supplies if you are configuring the router for a static IP address However the Router and all devices on the same local network must have the same subnet mask If you require a different class address you can edit the IP Mask field to enter the correct address Refer to the table below Number of Devices other than Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet Router on Local Network Mask 1 255 255 255 252 2 5 255 255 255 248 6 6 13 255 255 255 240 14 14 29 255 255 255 224 30 Understanding IP Addressing B 7 Number of Devices other than Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet Router on Local Network Mask 30 61 255 255 255 192 62 125 255 255 255 128 125 259 255 255 255 0 Configuration This section describes the specific IP address lease renew and release mechanisms for both the Mac and PC with either DHCP or MaclIP address serving DHCP address serving Windows 95 workstation m The Win95 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour m The Win95 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the machine is shut down m The lease can be manually expired using the WINIPCFG program a command line program executable from the DOS prompt or from the START RUN menu on a Windows based computer Windows 3 1 workstation MSTCP
99. Internet protocol the packet is carrying such as TCP or UDP Port numbers A filter can also match a packet s port number attributes but only if the filter s protocol type is set to TCP or UDP since only those protocols use port numbers The filter can be configured to match the following m The source port number the port on the sending host that originated the packet m The destination port number the port on the receiving host that the packet is destined for By matching on a port number a filter can be applied to selected TCP or UDP services such as Telnet FTP and World Wide Web The following tables show a few common services and their associated port numbers Telnet World Wide Web SMTP mail News Gopher rlogin Who Is 43 AppleTalk Routing 202 Maintenance at rtmp World Wide Web 80 AppleTalk Name Binding 202 at nbp SNMP 161 AURP AppleTalk 387 TFTP 69 who 513 10 22 Firmware User Guide Port number comparisons A filter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packet s source or destination port number The comparison options are No Compare No comparison of the port number specified in the filter with the packet s port number Not Equal To For the filter to match the packet s port number cannot equal the port number specified in the filter Less Than For the filter to match the packet s port number must be less than the port number specified in the fi
100. MIT in the Add or Change Key screen then press Escape three times to return to the Add or Change Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT in the Connection Profile screen and press Return Your changes become effective for the specified Connection Profile Power interruptions Netopia 4000 Series routers use NTP updates to set the correct time Consequently the starting time after a power cycle whether from power failure or deliberately switching power off and on is in the year 1904 This could invalidate some keys that would otherwise be valid To prevent this if the system time is before the year 2000 all keys are considered valid regardless of their specified date and time ranges IP Address Serving e Serve DHCP Clients e Serve BootP Clients e Serve Dynamic WAN Clients IP Address Serving Main System Menu Configuration In addition to being a router the Router is also an IP address server There are three protocols it can use to distribute IP addresses The first called Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is widely supported on PC networks as well as Apple Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system Addresses assigned via DHCP are leased or allocated for a short period of time if a lease is not renewed the address becomes available for use by another computer DHCP also allows most of the IP parameters for a computer to be configured by the
101. NETOPIA FIRMWARE USER GUIDE NETOPIA 4000 SERIES EQUIPMENT NETOPIA FIRMWARE VERSION 5 4 netopia BROADBAND WITHOUT BOUNDARIES Copyright Copyright 2004 Netopia Inc Netopia and the Netopia logo are registered trademarks belonging to Netopia Inc registered U S Patent and Trademark Office Broadband Without Boundaries and 3 D Reach are trademarks belonging to Netopia Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners All rights reserved Netopia Inc 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville CA 94608 U S A Part Number Netopia part number 6161184 00 01 Contents iii Contents Chapter 1 Introduction cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeenaes 1 1 What s New in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 065 1 1 Console based Management csscsssssesesssesesesenesereneeas 1 2 Netopia Console Men s sserrep 1 2 Netopia MOdEIS sissen EE E 1 3 Screen differeNCES caciusisisnceested eneudxandeswesseehemsrenmes 1 3 Connecting through a Telnet SeSSION csscssesseeeeeeees 1 4 Configuring Telnet SOftWAIE ccscceeeseceseeeserenees 1 4 Connecting a Console Cable to your Equipment 5 1 5 Navigating through the Console SCreens csccseeseeneeeees 1 7 Chapter 2 WAN and System Configuration c0ssesseeeee 2 1 WAN COnfSUratl OM wiscsisicessavnceiserssecereiesevesuans doncieesnesscansce 2 1 ADSL Line Configuration screen
102. Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 Such descriptions supersede the descriptions of the corresponding features given in the original User s Reference Guide if any accompanying your product What s New in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 New in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 are the following features a Multiple Data Link Encapsulation support on ATM based WAN interfaces See Multiple Data Link Encapsulation Settings on page 2 25 m Stateful Inspection Firewall See Stateful Inspection firewall on page 2 37 m IP Passthrough support See IP Passthrough on page 3 27 m Universal Plug and Play support UPnP See UPnP Support on page 10 2 1 2 Firmware User Guide Console based Management Console based management is a fast menu driven interface for the capabilities built into the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 Console based management provides access to a wide variety of features that the router supports You can customize these features for your individual setup This chapter describes how to access the console based management screens This section covers the following topics Netopia Console Menus on page 1 2 Netopia Models on page 1 3 Connecting through a Telnet Session on page 1 4 Connecting a Console Cable to your Equipment on page 1 5 Navigating through the Console Screens on page 1 7 Netopia Console Menus Console based management screens contain the main entry points to the
103. Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 configuration and monitoring features The entry points are displayed in the Main Menu shown below Netopia Data Router Netopia IAD Netopia Router Netopia IAD Easy Setup Easy Setup WAN Configuration WAN Configuration System Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Voice Configuration Statistics amp Logs Utilities amp Diagnostics Quick Menus Statistics amp Logs Quick View Quick Menus Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration ou always start from this main screen Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration ou always start from this main screen The Easy Setup menus display and permit changing the values contained in the default connection profile You can use Easy Setup to initially configure the router directly through a console session Easy Setup menus contain up to five descendant screens for viewing or altering these values The number of screens depends on whether you have optional features installed The Getting Started manual describes the Easy Setup menus to get you up and running quickly The WAN Configuration menu displays and permits changing your connection profile s Virtual Private Networks VPNs and default profile creating or deleting additional connection profiles and configuring or Introduction 1 3 reconfiguring the manner in which you may be using the router to
104. Netopia Router s address is 192 168 1 1 Web server s address is 192 168 1 253 Mail server s address is 192 168 1 254 FTP server s address is 192 168 1 253 In this example you will statically map the first five public IP addresses 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 5 to the first five corresponding private IP addresses 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 You will use these 1 to 1 mapped addresses to give your servers real addresses You will then map 206 1 1 6 to the remaining private IP addresses 192 168 1 6 192 168 1 254 using PAT The configuration process is as follows From the Main Menu go to the Easy Setup and then the Connection Profile screen Main Easy Connection Menu Setup Profile 3 32 Firmware User Guide Enter your ISP supplied values as shown below Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Connection Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered Local WAN IP Address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN IP Mask 255 255 255 248 PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Enter a subnet mask in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen Select NEXT SCREEN and press Return Your IP values are shown here IP Easy Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 Domain Name ISP net Primary Domain Name Server 173 166 Secondary Domain Name Server 173 166 Default IP Gateway 206 1 1 IP A
105. P Network Server PNS in PPTP language or a home agent in ATMP language In either case the Netopia Router wraps or encapsulates information that one end of the tunnel exchanges with the other in a wrapper called General Routing Encapsulation GRE at one end of the tunnel and unwraps or decapsulates it at the other end Configuring the Netopia Router for use with the different protocols is done through the console based menu screens Each type is described in its own section m About PPTP Tunnels on page 4 4 m About IPsec Tunnels on page 4 7 m About ATMP Tunnels on page 4 8 Your configuration depends on which protocol you and the router at the other end of your tunnel will use and whether or not you will be using the VPN client software in a standalone remote connection Note You must choose which protocol you will be using since you cannot both export PPTP and use ATMP or vice versa at the same time Having both an ATMP tunnel and a PPTP export is not possible because functions require GRE and the router s PPTP export server does not distinguish the GRE packets it forwards Since it processes all of them ATMP tunneling is impaired For example you cannot run an ATMP tunnel between two routers and also have PPTP exported on one side Summary A Virtual Private Network VPN connects the components of one network over another network VPNs accomplish this by allowing you to tunnel through the Internet or another p
106. P and static MaclP clients might not be considered served m The address range specified for address served clients cannot wrap around from the end of the total available range back to the beginning See below for a further explanation and an example m The network address issued by an ISP cannot be used as a host address A DHCP example Suppose for example that your ISP gave your network the IP address 199 1 1 32 and a 4 bit subnet mask Address 199 1 1 32 is reserved as the network address Address 199 1 1 47 is reserved as the broadcast address This leaves 14 addresses to allocate from 199 1 1 33 through 199 1 1 46 If you want to allocate a sub block of 10 addresses using DHCP enter 10 in the DHCP Setup screen s Number of Addresses to Allocate item Then in the same screen s First Address item enter the first address in the sub block to allocate so that all 10 addresses are within your original block You could enter 199 1 1 33 or 199 1 1 37 or any address between them Note that if you entered 199 1 1 42 as the first address network routing errors would probably result because you would be using a range with addresses that do not belong to your network 199 1 1 49 199 1 1 50 and 199 1 1 51 The DHCP server would not initialize if set incorrectly Understanding IP Addressing B 11 Nested IP Subnets Under certain circumstances you may want to create remote subnets from the limited number of IP addresses issued by your I
107. PAT Port Address Translation PAT allows a group of computers on a LAN such as might be found in a home or small office to share a single Internet connection using one IP address The computers on the LAN can surf the Web read e mail download files etc but their individual IP addresses are never exposed to the public network Instead a single IP address acts as the source IP address of traffic originating from the LAN The Netopia Router allows you to define multiple PAT mappings which can be individually mapped to different public IP addresses This offers more control over the access permitted to users on the LAN A limitation of PAT is that communication must be initiated from the internal network A user on the external side cannot access a machine behind a PAT connection A PAT enhancement is the ability to define multiple PAT mappings Each of these can optionally map to a section or range of IP addresses of the internal network PAT mapping allows only internal users to initiate traffic flow between the internal and external networks Server lists Server lists previously known as exported services make it possible to provide access from the public network to hosts on the LAN Server lists allow you to define particular services such as Web ftp or e mail which are available via a public IP address You define the type of service you would like to make available and the internal IP address to which you would like to provide access Y
108. ROR ETHERNET DSL G Current Date The current date this can be set with the Date and Time utility see Date and time on page 2 42 Default IP Gateway The router s default gateway which may be either manually configured or learned via DHCP This is the value you assigned in the Default IP Gateway field If you are using the router s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your default gateway it is shown here CPU Load Percentage of the system s resources being used by all current transmissions Unused Memory The total remaining system memory available for use Primary DNS Server If you are using the router s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your primary default gateway it is shown here Secondary DNS Server If you are using the router s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as a secondary gateway it is shown here Domain Name The domain name you have assigned typically the name of your ISP MAC Address The Router s hardware address for those interfaces that support DHCP IP Address The Router s IP address entered in the IP Setup screen Monitoring Tools 9 3 Current status The current status section is a table showing the current status of the DSL connection For example Current DSL Status Profile Name Rate Use Remote Address
109. S Type pop up menu select the type of NetBIOS used on your network DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve NetBIOS Type NetBIOS Type Serve NetBIOS Scope NetBIOS Scope Serve NetBIOS Name Server NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr Local network Broadcast nodes m To serve DHCP clients with the NetBIOS scope select Serve NetBIOS Scope and toggle it to Yes Select NetBIOS Scope and enter the scope m To serve DHCP clients with the IP address of a NetBIOS name server select Serve NetBIOS Name Server and toggle it to Yes Select NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr and enter the IP address for the NetBIOS name server You are now finished setting up DHCP NetBIOS Options To return to the IP Address Serving screen press Escape m To enable BootP s address serving capability select Serve BOOTP Clients and toggle to Yes Note Addresses assigned through BootP are permanently allocated from the IP Address Serving pool until you release them To release these addresses navigate back to the Main Menu then Statistics amp Logs Served IP Addresses and Lease Management Main Menu c Statistics amp Logs c Served IP Addresses m Lease Management 6 24 Firmware User Guide IP Address Lease Management Reset All Leases Release BootP Leases Reclaim Declined Addresses Hit RETURN ENTER you will return to the previous screen Select Release BootP Leases and press Return
110. SP or other authority You can do this using connection profiles These subnets can be nested within the range of IP addresses available to your network For example suppose that you obtain the Class C network address a b c 0 to be distributed among three networks This network address can be used on your main network while portions of it can be subnetted to the two remaining networks Note The IP address a b c 0 has letters in place of the first three numbers to generalize it for this example The figure shows a possible network configuration following this scheme The main network is set up with the Class C address a b c 0 and contains Router A which could be a Router a Router and a number of other hosts Router A maintains a link to the Internet and can be used as the default gateway B 12 Firmware User Guide Internet zA a b c 128 a b c 129 a b c 248 a b c 249 Routers B and C which could also be Routers serve the two remote networks that are subnets of a b c 0 The subnetting is accomplished by configuring the Router with connection profiles for Routers B and C see the following table For Router B a b c 128 255 255 255 192 For Router C a b c 248 255 255 255 248 The Router s connection profiles for Routers B and C create entries in its IP routing table One entry points to the subnet a b c 128 while a second entry points to the sub
111. VCs When the link comes up the router binds the VC dynamically to the first suitable Connection Profile or to the Default Profile if there is no Connection Profile configured f you factory default the router the VC binds to the Default Profile e f you delete a Connection Profile that is statically bound to a VC the VC binding is set back to the Default Profile If there is only one VC defined the VC dynamically binds to the first suitable profile or to the Default Profile If there are multiple VCs defined it binds to the Default Profile f you add a second VC it is initialized to the Default Profile and the menu screens display the VC Connection Profile related items allowing you to bind to a specific Connection Profile instead of the Default Profile In addition the router statically binds the first VC according to the rules used to select a profile for dynamic binding At this point each profile uses static binding when the link is brought up if there are no VCs when you add a VC for example if you deleted all your previous VCs and started adding them again dynamic binding will occur when the link comes up If you delete a VC leaving only one VC that VC resumes dynamically binding again m Select ADD Circuit NOW and press Return 4 To display or change a circuit select Display Change Circuit select a circuit from the pop up menu and press Return The fields are the same as those in the Add Circuit screen 5
112. Web port as if the server were located on a machine at IP address 206 1 1 2 Similarly the only communication with the Mail server is through port 25 the SMTP port as if it were located at IP address 206 1 1 2 3 36 Firmware User Guide Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 1 Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers IPsec PPTP and ATMP tunneling support for Virtual Private Networks VPN The following topics are covered in this chapter m Overview on page 4 1 m About PPTP Tunnels on page 4 4 m About IPsec Tunnels on page 4 7 m About ATMP Tunnels on page 4 8 m Encryption Support on page 4 10 m ATMP PPTP Default Profile on page 4 11 m VPN QuickView on page 4 13 m Dial Up Networking for VPN on page 4 14 m Installing the VPN Client on page 4 17 m Allowing VPNs through a Firewall on page 4 19 m Windows Networking Broadcasts on page 4 25 Overview When you make a long distance telephone call from your home to a relative far away you are creating a private network You can hold a conversation and exchange information about the happenings on opposite sides of the state or the continent that you are mutually interested in When your next door neighbor picks up the phone to call her daughter at college at the same time you are talking to your relatives your calls don t overlap but each is separate and private Neither house has a direct wire to the places they call
113. Yes This will display the Force Routing options m Toggle Force Routing to Yes m Enter the Gateway IP Address in standard dotted quad notation to which the traffic should be forwarded m You can enter Source and Destination IP Address es and Mask s Protocol Type and Source and Destination Port ID s for the filter if desired TOS field matching Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 adds two additional new parameters to an IP filter TOS and TOS Mask Both fields accept values in the range O 255 Certain types of IP packets such as voice or multimedia packets are sensitive to latency introduced by the network A delay sensitive packet is one that has the low latency bit set in the TOS field of the IP header This means that if such packets are not received rapidly the quality of service degrades If you expect to route significant amounts of such traffic you can configure your router to route this type of traffic to a gateway other than your normal gateway using this feature The TOS field matching check is consistent with source and destination address matching Example You want packets with the TOS low latency bit to go through VC 2 via gateway 127 0 0 3 instead of your normal gateway You would set up the filter as follows 10 36 Firmware User Guide Add Input Filter Enabled Yes Forward Yes Call Placement Idle Reset No Change Force Routing Yes Gateway IP Address 127 0 0 3 Source IP Address 0 0 Source IP Address Mask
114. a Router and the destination router The default is Yes 5 Select START TRACE ROUTE and press Return A scrolling screen will appear that lists the destination number of hops IP addresses of each hop and DNS names if selected 6 Cancel the trace by pressing Escape Return to the Trace Route screen by pressing Escape twice Telnet Client The Telnet client mode replaces the normal menu mode Telnet sessions can be cascaded that is you can initiate a Telnet client session when using a Telnet console session To activate the Telnet client select Telnet from the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu The Telnet client screen appears Telnet Host Name or IP Address Control Character to Suspend Q START A TELNET SESSION Resume Suspended Session Terminate Suspended Session m Enter the host name or the IP address in dotted decimal format of the machine you want to Telnet into and press Return m Either accept the default control character Q used to suspend the Telnet session or type a different one m START A TELNET SESSION becomes highlighted m Press Return and the Telnet session will be initiated m To suspend the session press Control Q or whatever other control character you specified m To go back to your Telnet session select Resume Suspended Session Select a session from the pop up 11 6 Firmware User Guide menu and press Return m To end a suspended session select Terminate Suspended Session Sel
115. al Menu amp Logs Statistics The General Statistics screen appears General Statistics Physical I F Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err Ethernet Hub 0 0 0 0 0 0 Aux Async 0 0 0 0 0 0 ATM SDSL 1 22152 5092 403 404 0 0 Network Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 VC Traffic Statistics Select VC Traffic Statistics The ATM VC Statistics screen appears WAN and System Configuration 2 23 ATM VC Statistics Frames Rx Frames Tx Bytes Rx Bytes Tx SCROLL UP 0 m To display more information about each circuit associated with the selected WAN module use the up or down arrow key to highlight the circuit you want to view Press Return A pop up window appears displaying detailed information for the selected circuit Frames Frames Errors Errors Circuit Name Connection Profile Name Bytes Rx Bytes Tx Rx Rx Discarded RX ATM VC Statistics Circuit 4 Profile 4 Frames Tx 0 Frames Tx Discarded 0 2 24 Firmware User Guide Creating a New Connection Profile Connection profiles are useful for configuring the connection and authentication settings for negotiating a PPP connection on a DSL link If you are using the PPP data link encapsulation method you can store your authentication information in the connection profile so that your user name and password or host name and secret are transmitted whe
116. and toggle it to Yes To remove the static route from the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to No m Be sure to read the rules on the installation of static routes in the IP routing table See Rules of static route installation on page 6 9 m Select Destination Network IP Address and enter the network IP address of the destination network Select Destination Network Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask used by the destination network m Select Next Gateway IP Address and enter the IP address for the router that the Router will use to reach the destination network This router does not necessarily have to be part of the destination network but it must at least know where to forward packets destined for that network m Select Route Priority and choose High or Low High means that the static route takes precedence over RIP IP Setup 6 9 information Low means that the RIP information takes precedence over the static route m If the static route conflicts with a connection profile the connection profile will always take precedence m To make sure that the static route is known only to the Router select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to No To allow other RIP capable routers to know about the static route select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to Yes When Advertise Route Via RIP is toggled to Yes a new item called RIP Metric appears below Advertise Route Via RIP With RIP Metric you set the number
117. ange is from 1 65535 End Port Protocol of the traffic to be allowed to the host range The acceptable range is from 1 65535 You can edit or delete exposed address lists by selecting Show Change Exposed Address List or Delete Exposed Address List A list of previously configured exposed addresses appears Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address Range Protocol 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 12 TCP and UDP Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit This allows you to select an exposed address list for editing or deletion 2 42 Firmware User Guide Date and time You can set the system s date and time parameters in the Set Date and Time screen Select Date and Time in the System Configuration screen and press Return The Set Date and Time screen appears Set Date and Time NTP Network Time Prot Enabled On Time Server Host Name IP Address 204 152 184 72 Time Zone GMT 8 00 Pacific Standard Time NTP Update Interval HHHH MM 0 00 System Date Format MM DD YY System Time Format AM PM Follow these steps to set the system s date and time 1 Toggle NTP Network Time Prot Enabled to On to synchronize the Router s time and date with a network server Toggle this field to Off to manually set the time and date the options in this screen will change to allow you to manually enter the time and date parameters Note If time and date are manually set that information will be lost upon r
118. apsulation Data Link Options Frame Relay RFC1483 ATMP IP Profile Parameters PPTP Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 9 When you define a Connection Profile as using ATMP by selecting ATMP as the datalink encapsulation method and then select Data Link Options the ATMP Tunnel Options screen appears ATMP Tunnel Options ATMP Partner IP Address 173 167 8 134 Tunnel Via Gateway 0 0 0 0 Network Name sam net Password KKK Data Encryption DES Key String Initiate Connections Yes On Demand Idle Timeout seconds 300 Note An ATMP tunnel cannot be assigned a dynamic IP address by the remote server as in a PPP connection When you define an ATMP tunnel profile the Local WAN IP Address assigned in the IP Profile Parameters screen must be the true IP address not 0 0 0 0 if NAT is enabled ATMP Partner IP Address specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel When unspecified the gateway can not initiate tunnels i e act as a foreign agent for this profile it can only accept tunnel requests as a home agent m When you specify the ATMP Partner IP Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters you can specify the route Tunnel Via Gateway by which the gateway partner is reached If you do not specify the ATMP Partner IP Address the router will use the default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidde
119. ard LZS Data Compression Standard LZS Send Authentication PAP Send Authentication PAP Send User Name Send User Name Send Password Send Password Receive User Name Receive User Name Receive Password Receive Password Dial on Demand Data Compression defaults to Standard LZS You gt If you are creating a Backup profile Supported can select Ascend LZS if you are connecting to models only and have selected Backup as the compatible equipment or None from the Interface Group in the previous screen you can pull down menu toggle Dial on Demand to Yes the default or No 2 The Send Authentication pull down menu lets See Line Beta GN page Titor mone information you select PAP CHAP or None Selecting PAP or CHAP allows you to enter your authentication credentials for both sending and receiving connections PAP requires a User Name and Password CHAP requires a Host Name and Secret The screen changes to accommodate your selection Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape 5 Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears WAN and System Configuration 2 27 IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Toggle or en
120. ass B or Class C addresses You can tell the various classes apart by the value of the first or high order byte Class A networks use values from 1 to 127 Class B networks use values from 128 to 191 and Class C networks use values from 192 to 223 The following table summarizes some of the differences between Class A B and C networks A 1 127 127 16 777 214 net host host host 97 3 14 250 B 128 191 16 384 65 534 net net host host 140 100 10 11 C 192 223 2 097 152 254 net net net host 197 204 13 7 Subnets and subnet masks Often an entire organization is assigned only one IP network number If the organization has several IP networks connected together with IP routers the network manager can use subnetting to distinguish between these networks even though they all use the same network number Each physical network becomes a subnet with a unique subnet number Understanding IP Addressing B 3 Subnet numbers appear within IP addresses along with network numbers and host numbers Since an IP address is always 32 bits long using subnet numbers means either the network number or the host numbers must use fewer bits in order to leave room for the subnet numbers Since the InterNIC assigns the network number proper it should not change so the subnet numbers must be created out of bits that would otherwise be part of the host numbers Subnet masks To create subnets the network manager must define a subnet mask
121. ation Of Tenis seesinane 8 1 Configuring the Voice Features essesssereressseressnesessrererss 8 2 Chapter 9 Monitoring Tools c ccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 Quick View Status OVErvieW cccceccecsceececeececeeseseeaeees 9 1 General Stati Ssss emeneso nn eE 9 2 GUE AU Status niisiis daaa diees 9 3 Status MENiS r EES 9 3 Statistics Gi LOSS ranipun aiia ieena 9 4 Event HiStONE Siisera aN Er 9 4 IP ROUUINE Wall Onine a ai 9 7 General StawlStiCs ess cvisecosnacsesancveseesenciseansavea E 9 7 System MMMONMAU ONiesh sieved dint Sedaudarsc aeiia ideii 9 9 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP V2c 9 10 Enterprise specific SNMP Changes sscseeeee 9 10 The SNMP Setup SCIreeN ccccceceececeeseeeeeees 9 11 SNMP raposas a N 9 12 Chapter 10 Security c scceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeens 10 1 Suggested Security MEASUNES asmia a 10 1 Console Tiered Access Two Password Levels 045 10 2 WP SUP DOIN sesicsiccedscactasesessancssnesca anara 10 2 Superuser confe urato sieneen 10 3 Limited user configuration ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeneenees 10 4 viii Firmware User Guide Advanced Security Options csscssesseseseeeeees 10 5 User ACCESS PASSWOIM cccceceececeeceseeeeeeeanees 10 7 USEF MENU GITTERENCES mrisani 10 8 User ACCOUNTS sxiizcsiatixextenpiecestedsicasrsgesaaeiaxcsinenedensecs 10 15 TEINGt ACCESS aran
122. be returned to the Configuration Management screen If you choose to run one of your stored configurations you can select it from a pop up menu If you select Boot from a Configuration and select a different one you can reboot the router with your selected configuration 10 46 Firmware User Guide Configuration Management Save Current Configuration as Configuration Name Type Replace Existing Configuration Boot from a Configuration Backup Config Binary Delete a Configuration HappyInternet A warning screen will ask you to confirm your choice Security 10 47 TFTP and X Modem You can also send or receive your stored configuration files via TFTP or X Modem You select the stored configuration files from pull down menus in the TFTP or X Modem File Transfer screens in the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu as shown TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP TFTP Server Name Firmware File Name GET ROUTER FIRMWARE FROM SERVER Config File Name Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration GET CONFIG FROM SERVER Backup Config HappyInternet Send Configuration lt Empty gt Type Name SEND CONFIG TO SERVER TFTP Transfer State Idle TFTP Current Transfer Bytes 0 Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit X Modem X Modem File Transfer Send Firmware to Netopia Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration Send Config to Netopia Backup
123. bered IP mask such as 255 255 255 0 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address a b c d m Source IP Address Mask e f g h m Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Protocol Type O 10 34 Firmware User Guide FTP sessions To allow WAN originated FTP sessions to a LAN based FTP server with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Source IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address a b c d m Dest IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 m Protocol Type TCP m Source Port Comparison No Compare m Source Port ID O m Dest Port Comparison Equal m Dest Port ID 24 Note A similar filter could be used to permit Telnet or WWW access Set the Dest Port ID to 23 for Telnet or to 80 for WWW Note Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set However the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect unless they are part of another set The deleted set will no longer appear in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was added Policy based Routing using Filtersets Previous firmware versions routed IP packets only by destination IP address Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers the ability to route IP packets
124. called the ACK bit or TCP Ack bit This ACK bit appears only with TCP not UDP The ACK bit is part of the TCP mechanism that guarantees the delivery of data The ACK bit is set whenever one side of a connection has received data from the other side Only the first TCP packet will not have the ACK bit set once the TCP connection is in place the remainder of the TCP packets with have the ACK bit set The ACK bit is helpful for firewall design and reduces the number of potential filter rules A filter rule could be created just allowing incoming TCP packets with the ACK bit set since these packets had to be originated from the local network Example filter set screen This is an example of the Netopia filter set screen Change Input Filter 1 Enabled Yes Forward No Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type TCP Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare Equal Dest Port ID 2000 Established TCP Conns Only No Filter basics In the source or destination IP address fields the IP address that is entered must be the network address of the subnet A host address can be entered but the applied subnet mask must be 32 bits 255 255 255 255 The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 has the ability to compare source and destination TCP or UDP ports These options are as follows No Compare Does not compare TCP or UDP port Not Equal To Matche
125. ccsccicccsceccarsaccccteeasroanewcxonane 3 21 IP Parameters WAN Default Profile 000 3 23 NAT ASSOGIQUONS ronseis iea 3 25 IP PASSUWOUGN ec cxcutnsrcdcentdssndcsestabesnadtaxeusemeneixatecuneaaenn 3 27 MultiNAT Configuration Example cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 31 Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNS c0sessessseseeeeee 4 1 OVEN VSW taiicuactantencectacadyacaaptads telnraukatiebeedles nie duademasdwadmedes 4 1 About PPTP TUNNE Sinanin aaia a ARA 4 4 PPTP COMMSUNATION siriarren a 4 4 About IPSEC TINNE Seis occdsccievnasteeausseceseri ances sersecenectecirane 4 7 About ATMP TUNES ncnian rinie aana 4 8 ATMP2GOnMGUraulOn sisswatesinGamavteesienctindstedsaadewoumetses 4 8 Encryption SUP PORE siicccicesetaccdiale de idecnisdentanetiadcentenates 4 10 MS CHAP V2 and 128 bit strong encryption 4 11 ATMP PPTP Default Profil sciscccicctiecccienestettessnccntnneacecnass 4 11 VPN QUICK VIEW sscsinesisncnswsncciadanenccntamenieninndeqezecaameamuiatsoadnentis 4 13 Dial Up Networking Tor VPN sisvscisssecsnioncesccietieansexseetcenns 4 14 Installing Dial Up Networking cccescseeseenereees 4 14 Creating a new Dial Up Networking profile 4 15 Configuring a Dial Up Networking profile 4 16 Installing the VPN Cemais 4 17 Windows 95 VPN installation ccceceseeeeeneeeees 4 17 Windows 98 VPN installation ccccceeeeeeeneeeees 4 18 Connecting using Dial Up Networking
126. cess password Users must be able to change their names and passwords regardless of other security access restrictions If a user does not have security access then they will only be able to modify the password for their account When a limited access user logs into the router and accesses the System Configuration menus the only Security option displayed is Change Access Password System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time Console Configuration Change Access Password Upgrade Feature Set Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Selecting this option displays the Change Access Password screen Change Access Password New Password CHANGE PASSWORD NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes When changing a password you will be challenged to enter it again to be sure you have entered it correctly 10 8 Firmware User Guide User menu differences Menus reflect the security access level of the user Consequently configuration menus will display differing options based upon the parameters a particular user is allowed to change Some differences include Limited users non Superusers do not have access to Easy Setup m All users have access to System Configuration Quick Menus and Quick View but limited users have only limited access to co
127. change delete Scheduled Connections Viewing scheduled connections To display a table of scheduled connections select Display Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen Each scheduled connection occupies one row of the table Scheduled Connections mtWtfss 08 30PM 06 00 weekly Profile 01 The first column in the table shows a one letter representation of the Days of the week from Monday M or m to Sunday S or s If a letter representing a day is capitalized the connection will be activated on that day a lower case letter means that the connection will not be activated on that day If the scheduled connection is configured for a once only connection the word once will appear instead of the days of the week WAN and System Configuration 2 31 The other columns show m The time of day that the connection will Begin At m The duration of the connection HH MM m Whether it s a recurring Weekly connection or used Once Only m Which connection profile Conn Prof is used to connect m Whether the scheduled connection is currently Enabled The router checks the date and time set in scheduled connections against the system date and time Adding a scheduled connection To add a new scheduled connection select Add Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen and press Return The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears Add Scheduled Connection Scheduled Connection Enable On How Often We
128. connect to more than one service provider or remote site See WAN Configuration beginning on page 2 1 See also Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs m The System Configuration menus display and permit changing e IP Setup e Filter Sets e IP Address Serving e Network Address Translation NAT e Stateful Inspection e Date and Time e Console Configuration e SNMP Simple Network e Security Management Protocol e Upgrade Feature Set e Change Device to a Bridge e Logging See System Configuration Screens beginning on page 2 35 m For IADs the Voice Configuration menus provide the tools for configuring the voice telephone features available in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 See Chapter 8 Voice Configuration m The Utilities amp Diagnostics menus provide a selection of seven tools for monitoring and diagnosing the router s behavior as well as for updating the firmware and rebooting the system See Chapter 11 Utilities and Diagnostics m The Statistics amp Logs menus display nine sets of tables and device logs that show information about your router your network and their history See Statistics amp Logs beginning on page 9 4 m The Quick Menus screen is a shortcut entry point to the most commonly used configuration menus that are accessed through the other menu entry points m The Quick View menu displays at a glance current real time operating information about your router See Qu
129. creen m Select the Server List Name you want to modify from the pop up menu and press Return Network Address Translation NAT Server List Name my_ servers A S D A S D A S D Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit The Show Change NAT Server List screen appears Show Change NAT Server List Server List Name my_servers Add Server Show Change Server Delete Server Multiple Network Address Translation 3 19 m Selecting Show Change Server or Delete Server displays the same pop up menu Show Change NAT Server List Private Address Public Address Port Se Ad Sh De Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Select any server from the list and press Return The Change NAT Server screen appears Change NAT Server My Exports Service smtp Server Private IP Address 192 168 1 254 Public IP Address 206 1 1 1 CHANGE NAT SERVER You can make changes to the server s service and port or internal or external address Select CHANGE NAT SERVER and press Return Your changes take effect and you are returned to the Show Change NAT Server List screen 3 20 Firmware User Guide Deleting a server To delete a server from the list select Delete Server from the Show Change NAT Server List menu and press Return A pop up menu lists your configured servers Select the one you want to delete and press Return A dialo
130. creens on a given router or IAD Here all selection options are shown Security 10 13 Based on access level the Statistics amp Logs menu displays its options according to the following diagram Global Global Voice Voice Voice Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Statistics amp Logs WAN Event History gt Device Event History BVoice Log Voice Accounting Log pVoice Error Log IP Routing Table Served IP Addresses Served IP Addresses Accounting Statistics p gt Backup Management Statistics General Statistics System Information 10 14 Firmware User Guide Quick Menus Quick Menus vary considerably between models features and access levels The following is an example comparison of the Quick Menu as seen by the Superuser and by a Limited user Superuser Quick Menu Connection Profiles Line Configuration IP Setup Add Connection Profiles Fr Relay Config IP Address Serving Setup Change Connection Profiles Fr Relay DLCI Config IP Filter Sets Delete Connection Profiles Backup Config Static Routes WAN Default Profile Telephone Setup Network Address Translation ATMP PPTP Default Profile IKE Phase 1 Config Scheduled Connections Add Scheduled Connection Change Scheduled Connection MacIP Setup Delete Scheduled Connection X Modem File Transfer AURP Setup TFTP Console Configuration SNMP Setup Limited user
131. ction Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Data Link Encapsulation PPP Data Link Options IP Profile Parameters COMMIT CANCEL Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit On a Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 although only one can be used at a time unless you are using VPNs IP Setup 6 33 Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile It can be any name you wish For example the name of your ISP Toggle the Profile Enabled value to Yes or No The default is Yes Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Toggle or enter any IP parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape For more information on NAT see Multiple Network Address Translation beginning on page 3 1 The Local WAN IP Address is displayed for numbered or NAT profiles The Local WAN IP Mask is displayed for numbered profiles The Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask are displayed for unnumbered profiles 6 3
132. d TCP Conns Only No Select Input Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 21 Change Input Filter 2 Enabled Yes Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type In the Display Change Filter Set screen select Display Change Output Filter Display Change Output Filter screen Yes Yes Yes Yes Select Output Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 1 screen set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below Change Output Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare Equal Dest Port ID 1723 Established TCP Conns Only No 4 22 Firmware User Guide Select Output Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Output Filter 2 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type ATMP example To enable a firewall to allow ATMP traffic you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound UDP packets specifically destined for port 5150 The source port may be dynamic so often it is
133. dd NAT Server List Server List Name my servers Add Server m Select Server List Name and type in a descriptive name A new menu item Add Server appears 3 16 Firmware User Guide m Select Add Server and press Return The Add NAT Server screen appears Add NAT Server my servers Service Server Private IP Address 192 168 1 45 Public IP Address 206 1 1 1 ADD NAT SERVER m Select Service and press Return A pop up menu appears listing a selection of commonly exported services Add NAT Server my servers Service Server Private IP Address Public IP Address ADD NAT SERVER m Choose the service you want to export and press Return You can choose a preconfigured service from the list or define your own by selecting Other If you select Other a screen is displayed that allows you to enter the port number range for your customized service Multiple Network Address Translation 3 17 Other Exported Port First Port Number 1 65535 31337 Last Port Number 1 65535 31337 m Enter the First and Last Port Number between ports 1 and 65535 Select OK and press Return You will be returned to the Add NAT Server screen m Enter the Server Private IP Address of the server whose service you are exporting Since MultiNAT permits the mapping of multiple private IP addresses to multiple public IP addresses your ISP or corporate site s router must be configured such that it knows that your mu
134. ddress Serving On Number of Client IP Addresses 20 lst Client Address 192 168 PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen Then navigate to the Network Address Translation NAT screen Main p System IP Network Address Menu Configuration Setup Translation NAT Multiple Network Address Translation 3 33 Select Show Change Public Range then Easy PAT Range and press Return Enter the value your ISP assigned for your public address 206 1 1 6 in this example Toggle Type to pat Your public address is then mapped to the remaining private IP addresses using PAT If you were not using the Easy PAT Range and Easy PAT List that are created by default by using Easy Setup you would have to define a public range and map list For the purpose of this example you can just alter this range and list Change NAT Public Range Range Name Easy PAT Range Type pat Public Address 206 1 1 6 First Public Port Last Public Port CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE Select CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return This returns you to the Network Address Translation screen Select Add Public Range and press Return Type a name for this static range as shown below Enter the first and last public addresses your ISP assigned in their respective fields as shown The first five public IP addresses 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 5 in this example are statically
135. ddresses used 249 by a b c 248 _ 254 Broadcasts As mentioned earlier binary IP host or subnet addresses composed entirely of ones or zeros are reserved for broadcasting A broadcast packet is a packet that is to be delivered to every host on the network if both the host address and the subnet address are all ones or all zeros or to every host on the subnetwork if the host address is all ones or all zeros but the subnet address is a combination or zeros and ones Instead of making many copies of the packet individually addressed to different hosts all the host machines know to pay attention to broadcast packets as well as to packets addressed to their specific individual host addresses Depending on the age and type of IP equipment you use broadcasts will be addressed using either all zeros or all ones but not both If your network requires zeros broadcasting you must configure this through SNMP Packet header types As previously mentioned IP works with other protocols to allow communication over IP networks When IP is used on an Ethernet network IP works with the Ethernet or 802 3 framing standards among other protocols These two protocols specify two different ways to organize the very first signals in the sequence of electrical signals that make up an IP packet travelling over Ethernet By default the Router uses Ethernet packet headers for IP traffic If your network requires 802 3 IP framing you must configure this th
136. dependent and are compared in order from the top of the list to the bottom If a particular resource is not available subordinate mappings can be defined that will redirect traffic Supported traffic MultiNat supports the following IP protocols m PAT TCP UDP traffic which does not carry source or destination IP addresses or ports in the data stream i e HTTP Telnet r commands tftp NFS NTP SMTP NNTP etc m Static NAT All IP protocol traffic which does not carry or otherwise rely on the source or destination IP addresses in the data stream m Dynamic NAT All IP protocol traffic which does not carry or otherwise rely on the source or destination IP addresses in the data stream Support for Microsoft Network MSN Messenger Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 provides support for MSN Messenger Windows Messenger applications via UPnP see UPnP Support on page 10 2 Normal plain chat always works Support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM File Transfer Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 provides Application Level Gateway ALG support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM file transfer This allows AIM users to exchange files even when both users are behind NAT Previously the file transfer function would work only if one or neither of the two users were behind NAT 3 6 Firmware User Guide Currently there is a restriction that the remote user must be routed to via the WAN interface otherwise the connections will fail There is no re
137. dual machines IP addresses are maintained and assigned by the InterNIC a quasi governmental organization now increasingly under the auspices of private industry Note It s very common for an organization to obtain an IP address from a third party usually an Internet service provider ISP ISPs usually issue an IP address when they are contracted to provide Internet access services The InterNIC the NIC stands for Network Information Center divides IP addresses into several classes Classes A B and C are assigned to organizations that request addresses In Class A networks the first byte of an IP address is reserved for the network portion of the address Class B networks reserve the first two bytes of an IP address for the network address Class C networks reserve the first three bytes of an IP address for the network address In all cases a network manager can decide to use subnetting to assign even more bits to the network portion of the IP address but never less than the class requires The following section gives more information on subnetting Class A networks have a small number of possible network numbers but a large number of possible host numbers Conversely Class C networks have a small number of possible host numbers but a large number of possible network numbers Thus the InterNIC assigns Class A addresses to large organizations that have very large numbers of IP hosts while smaller organizations with fewer hosts get Cl
138. e Add Connection Profile screen the Superuser can toggle the Superuser Accessible Only option to Yes or No Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Superuser Accessible Only No COMMIT CANCEL h a Return Enter to accept the profile Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit This option is visible whether or not there are authorized username passwords other than the Superuser The Superuser can also change the user accessibility after creating a Connection Profile or a limited user in the Change Connection Profile screen System Configuration menu Security 10 11 The System Configuration menu is always available to all users Based on access level the System Configuration menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram Global All Superuser Superuser All All Superuser All System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Bridge Logging se this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Note Network Address Translation NAT is displayed in this screen in order to make access control simpler Security becomes Change Access
139. e Local and Remote Identity Type and Value menus allow you to specify one of the following based on what Local Identity Type you selected in the previous pop up menu IPv4 Address A single IPv4 address in the familiar dotted quad notation a b c d IPv4 Subnet A single IPv4 network address in dotted quad notation a b c d followed by a mask specified either by a slash and a bit count between O and 32 OR by a second dotted quad IPv4 Range Two IPv4 addresses in dotted quad notation a b c d separated by a space Host Name A fully qualified domain name FQDN E Mail Address An RFC 822 e mail address in the form user hostname Key ID ASCII An opaque string consisting of printable ASCII characters represented as a sequence of printable ASCII characters Key ID HEX An opaque string consisting of arbitrary 8 bit ASCII values represented as a sequence of hexadecimal digits each of which corresponds to one nibble of the string value The Authentication Method pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 authentication method The only currently supported authentication method is Shared Secret Other methods may be supported in future firmware releases The Shared Secret field allows you to enter a shared secret phrase between 1 and 48 characters long 5 6 Firmware User Guide that will be used to generate key material for IKE Phase 1 The Encryption Algorithm pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 encryption algorithm and may be either
140. e and go to the Set Weekly Schedule screen m Select the days for the scheduled connection to occur and toggle them to Yes Set Weekly Schedule Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Scheduled Window Start Time AM or PM Scheduled Window Duration Per Day m Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection m You must enter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM from the pop up menu m Select Scheduled Window Duration Per Day and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled connection per call You are finished configuring the weekly options Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue WAN and System Configuration 2 33 Set Once Only Schedule If you set How Often to Once Only select Set Once Only Schedule and go to the Set Once Only Schedule screen Set Once Only Schedule Place Call on MM DD YY 05 07 1998 Scheduled Window Start Time 11 50 AM or PM AM Scheduled Window Duration 00 00 Select Place Call On Date and enter a date in the
141. e configuration screens with user accounts You can administer the accounts from the Security Options screen You can create up to four accounts To display a view only list of user accounts select Show Users in the Security Options screen Security 10 17 To add a new user account select Add User in the Security Options screen and press Return The Add Name With Write Access screen appears Add Name With Write Access Enter Name Enter Password 11 characters max ADD NAME PASSWORD NOW Follow these steps to configure the new account 1 Select Enter Name and enter a descriptive name for example the user s first name 2 Select Enter Password and enter a password 3 To accept the new name password combination select ADD NAME PASSWORD NOW and press Return To exit the Add Name With Write Access screen without saving the new account select CANCEL You are returned to the Security Options screen To delete a user account select Delete User to display a list of accounts Select an account from the list and press Return to delete it To exit the list without deleting the selected account press Escape Telnet Access Telnet is a TCP IP service that allows remote terminals to access hosts on an IP network The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports Telnet access to its configuration screens Caution You should consider password protecting or restricting Telnet access to the Router if you suspect there is a chance of tam
142. e including the IP address and other relevant information for the remote ATMP partner ATMP uses the terminology of a foreign agent that initiates tunnels and a home agent that terminates them You use the same procedure to initiate or terminate an ATMP tunnel Used in this way the terms initiate and terminate mean the beginning and end of the tunnel they do not mean activate and deactivate ATMP is a tunneling protocol with two basic aspects Tunnels are created and torn down using a session protocol that is UDP based User or client data is transferred across the tunnel by encapsulating the client data within Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE The GRE data is then routed using standard methods ATMP configuration ATMP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles It is not an option in device or link configuration screens since ATMP is not a native encapsulation The Easy Setup Profile does not offer ATMP datalink encapsulation See Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 24 for information on creating Connection Profiles The WAN Event History screens will report VPN tunnel events such as connections and disconnections as Channel 4 and higher events To define an ATMP tunnel navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration a Profile Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 2 Profile Enabled Data Link Enc
143. e network connection here Configuration for Router B IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No Remote IP Address 192 168 1 1 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Filter Set NetBIOS Proxy Enabled Yes RIP Profile Options Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 27 Note Microsoft Network browsing is available with or without a Windows Internet Name Service WINS server Shared volumes on the remote network are accessible with or without a WINS server Local LAN shared volumes that have Port Address Translation PAT applied to them are not available to hosts on the remote LAN For tunnelled traffic NAT on the WAN has no effect on the Microsoft Networking traffic Make sure the NetBIOS filter is not enabled in your Internet Connection Profile Netopia includes the NetBIOS Proxy feature as an enhancement and convenience for our customers It has been lab tested and many customers use it successfully However Netopia cannot guarantee that this feature will automatically give you the networking functionality you expect There are many possible issues with the various Windows operating systems that may prevent NetBIOS from functioning as described above Netopia Technical Support does not troubleshoot problems customers may encounter with their Windows operating system 4 28 Firmware User Guide
144. e router itself must have an IP address To enable DHCP select Serve DHCP Clients and toggle it to Yes DHCP serving is automatic when IP Address Serving is enabled The default DHCP Lease time is one hour This may be unnecessarily brief in your network environment IP Setup 6 19 Consequently the DHCP lease time is configurable The DHCP Lease Time Hours setting allows you to modify the router s default lease time of one hour You can enter any number up to and including 168 hours one week for the DHCP lease Note About DHCP Auto configuration Beginning with Firmware Version 5 3 4 routers whose model number ends in T will allow the IP Address Server to auto configure when the router is configured with a new IP Address and Subnet Mask This applies according to the following guidelines e If you configure the router with a 24 bit Subnet Mask Class C the router will continue serving from 100 199 with the new IP Address e If you configure the router with a subnet smaller than a Class C subnet the router will serve all available addresses e If you explicitly configure the DHCP pool auto configuration of the DHCP pool is suppressed e If you configure the router manually and you would like the router to auto configure DHCP you must explicitly set the IP Address and Subnet Mask to 0 0 0 0 and reboot If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets the appearance of the IP Address Serving screen is altered slig
145. eboot or loss of power Enter the IP address of the time server in the field Time Server Host Name IP Address Select the Router s time zone from the Time Zone pop up menu and press Return In the NTP Update Interval field enter how often to synchronize with the time server using the format HHHH MM where H is hours and M is minutes 5 Select a System Date Format the options are MM DD YY DD MM YY and YY MM DD where M is month D is day and Y is year Select a System Time Format either AM PM or 24hrs Press Escape to return to the System Configuration menu Note NTP can be blocked by some firewall configurations To ensure that this feature works create a filterset rule to allow UDP port 123 to be open WAN and System Configuration 2 43 Console Configuration You can change the default terminal communications parameters to suit your requirements To go to the Console Configuration screen select Console Configuration in the System Configuration screen Console Configuration Baud Rate 57600 SET CONFIG NOW Follow these steps to change a parameter s value 1 Select 57600 38400 19200 or 9600 2 Select SET CONFIG NOW to save the new parameter settings Select CANCEL to leave the parameter unchanged and exit the Console Configuration screen SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These screens allow you to monitor and configure your network by means of a standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP
146. ect Forward Secrecy Ping host Ping retry interval Ping reply timeout Ping host allows you to specify the host IP address of the host to ping and from which replies will be expected This field is only available if you have previously configured and committed remote network IP data in the Add Network Configuration screen under Advanced IP Profile Options See Add Network Configuration on page 5 15 Ping retry interval and Ping reply timeout options appear The defaults are 5 seconds and 90 seconds respectively You may adjust these to suit your network s tolerances Note e ICMP Dead Peer Detection is not available when using manual re keying e ICMP Dead Peer Detection does not initiate a series of phase 2 exchanges upon detecting a dead peer it instead initiates a new phase 1 negotiation followed by a new phase 2 negotiation once contact with the peer has been re established e If you are using Multiple Network IPsec the IP address of the ICMP Dead Peer Detection mechanism must be constrained to the set of network ranges defined for the IPsec profile Press Escape to return to the Add or Change Connection Profile screen and select IP Profile Parameters 5 14 Firmware User Guide If you enable IKE key management the IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Remote Tunnel Endpoint 0 0 0 0 Add Network Address Translation Enabled Filter Set lt lt None gt gt Remove Fi
147. ect a session from the pop up menu and press Return Factory Defaults You can reset the Router to its factory default settings In the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen select Revert to Factory Defaults and press Return Select CONTINUE in the dialog box and press Return The Router will reboot and its settings will return to the factory defaults deleting your configurations In an emergency you can also use the Reset switch to return the router to its factory default settings Call Netopia Technical Support for instructions on using the Reset switch Note Reset to factory defaults with caution You will need to reconfigure all of your settings in the router If you lose your password and are unable to access the console screens you can manually reset the router in an emergency See Appendix A Troubleshooting Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP is a method of transferring data over an IP network TFTP is a client server application with the router as the client To use the Router as a TFTP client a TFTP server must be available Netopia Inc has a public access TFTP server on the Internet where you can obtain the latest firmware versions To use TFTP select Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP in the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen and press Return The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP screen appears Utilities and Diagnostics 11 7 Trivial File Transfe
148. ed characteristics for the backup port Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Data Link Encapsulation PPTP Data Link Options IP Enabled IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary Telco Options Backup COMMIT Return Enter to discard changes you have made Profile will not be added Configure a new Conn Profile Finished ADD or CANCEL to exit For instructions on creating a Connection Profile see Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 24 To associate this Connection Profile with your backup port interface choose Backup from the Interface Port pop up menu and press Return If you choose Backup Telco Options becomes visible The Telco Options screen allows you to set the parameters for the modem connection 7 8 Firmware User Guide Telco Options Dial Dial In Out Number to Dial Alternate Site to Dial Dial on Demand Idle Timeout seconds Callback m From the Dial pop up menu you can choose whether to Dial Out Only Dial In Only or Dial In Out default m You can add the Number to Dial and an Alternate Site to Dial if available m You can toggle Dial on Demand to Yes or No This allows the router to determine whether or not to dial the backup number when there is traffic that needs to be transmitted or received m You can set the Idle Timeout seconds to tear down the connection after some specified period of inactivity m You ca
149. either VC Multiplexed or LLC SNAP m If you are using RFC1483 the RFC1483 Mode menu offers either Bridged 1483 or Routed 1483 Bridged 1483 displays a PPP over Ethernet PPPoE toggle item that can be toggled either On or Off WAN and System Configuration 2 5 IDSL Line Configuration screen The IDSL Line Configuration screen is shown below IDSL Line Configuration Line Type IDSL Data Rate kbps 144 2B D Data Link Encapsulation Return Enter to select lt among between gt Enter information supplied to you by your ISDN phone company m For IDSL lines the Data Rate kbps pull down menu offers 64 B1 64 B2 128 B1 B2 or 144 2B D m The Data Link Encapsulation pull down menu offers PPP HDLC or Frame Relay m If you are using Frame Relay a PPP over Frame Relay Enabled option appears and allows you to tog gle it either On or Off m f you enable PPP over Frame Relay the DLCI and LMI fields appear The DLCI field is editable the default is 16 The LMI pull down menu offers the choices None ANSI Annex D CCITT Annex A or LMI 2 6 Firmware User Guide G SHDSL Line Configuration screen The G SHDSL Line Configuration screen is shown below DSL Line Configuration Regional Setting Cell Format Scrambled Unused Cell Format Idle Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 PPP over Ethernet PPPOE off Each access concentrator DSLAM has a different set
150. ekly Schedule Type Forced Set Weekly Schedule Use Connection Profile ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION CANCEL Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once Only basis Follow these steps to configure the new scheduled connection m To activate the connection select Scheduled Connection Enable and toggle it to On You can make the scheduled connection inactive by toggling Scheduled Connection Enable to Off m Decide how often the connection should take place by selecting How Often and choosing Weekly or Once Only from the pop up menu m The Schedule Type allows you to set the exact weekly schedule or once only schedule Options are m Forced Up meaning that this connection will be maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line m Forced Down meaning that this connection will be torn down or blocked whether or not there is a 2 32 Firmware User Guide demand call on the line m Demand Allowed meaning that this schedule will permit a demand call on the line Demand Blocked meaning that this schedule will prevent a demand call on the line m Periodic meaning that the connection is retried several times during the scheduled time m f How Often is set to Weekly the item directly below How Often reads Set Weekly Schedule If How Often is set to Once Only the item directly below How Often reads Set Once Only Schedule Set Weekly Schedule If you set How Often to Weekly select Set Weekly Schedul
151. elay of O seconds forces packets to be sent immediately one after another Select START PING and press Return to begin the Ping test While the test is running the START PING item becomes STOP PING To manually stop the Ping test select STOP PING and press Return or Escape While the Ping test is running and when it is over a status field and a number of statistical items are active on the screen These are described below Utilities and Diagnostics 11 3 Status The current status of the Ping test This item can display the status messages shown in the able below Message Description Resolving host name Finding the IP address for the domain name style address Can t resolve host name IP address can t be found for the domain name style address Pinging Ping test is in progress Complete Ping test was completed Cancelled by user Ping test was cancelled manually Destination unreachable from Ping test was able to reach the router with IP address w x y z W X Y Z which reported that the test could not reach the final destination Couldn t allocate packet buffer Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Couldn t open ICMP port Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Packets Out The number of packets sent by the Ping test Packets In The number of return packets received from the target host To be considered on time return packets are expected back before the next
152. ember IP addresses See the chapter Security on page 10 1 for more information Traffic originating from local member LAN addresses that is not addressed to remote member addresses as well as traffic originating from local LAN IP addresses that do not match any local member specifications is routed using the normal routing table This means that if you want to restrict traffic from local members from going out to the Internet and force it all to go through one or more tunnels you need to specify remote members of 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 0 0 0 0 0 Traffic originating from the router for example telnet ping DNS queries will not use the default VPN definition even if the source addresses match Traffic to and from the router is included in specific VPNs Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration IPsec tunnels are defined in the same manner as PPTP tunnels See Virtual Private Networks VPNs on page 4 1 for more information You configure the Connection Profile as follows From the Main Menu navigate to WAN Configuration and then Add Connection Profile Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs Main WAN Menu Configuration Add Connection gt Profile The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Profile 1 Frame Relay R
153. ement access Macintosh users should use Console Only mode m If you select Modem Auto you can select its Data Rate from a pop up menu edit the Serial Modem Init String if necessary and enter your local Serial Modem Directory Number Changes to Serial Port Mode take place after a reboot This is not automatic You may continue to con figure these settings and after you are finished you must reboot the router manually See Restarting the System on page 11 12 m Press Escape twice to return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Advanced Connection Options then Backup Configuration Shown on page 7 5 Backup Configuration screen This screen is used to configure the conditions under which backup will occur if it will recover and how the Console port is configured For a modem connected to the Console port the Backup Configuration screen appears as follows Backup Configuration Backup Parameters Backup is Automatic Requires Failure of minutes 1 Ping Host Name or IP Address Recovery to ADSL Automatic Requires Recovery of minutes 1 Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 Yes Layer 2 Failure Timer seconds 0 Clear Backup Call only if idle Yes Requires idle time of seconds 300 Data Link Encapsulation is Async PPP Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company m Select Backup is and from the pop up menu select Automatic default Manual or Disabled You enable line backup b
154. ement algorithm m The Default CIR CIR also referred to as Committed Information Rate represents the average capacity available to a given PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or DLC Data Link Connection Identifier This set WAN and System Configuration 2 11 ting defaults to 64000 but you may modify the capacity rate if this setting will not be applicable to you m The Default Be Bc also referred to as Committed Burst Size represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame Relay service provider agrees to transfer from a given PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier This setting defaults to 64000 but you may change the capacity rate if necessary m The Default Be Be also referred to as Excess Burst Size represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame Relay service provider will attempt to deliver to a given PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier This setting defaults to O but you may change the capacity rate if necessary Note Some Frame Relay service providers allow for over subscription of the DLCls which occurs when the total number of CIRs for all PVCs exceeds the line rate setup 3 Select Congestion Management Enabled and toggle to Yes or No depending on whether you use this selection Press Return If Congestion Management is enabled this option causes the Netopia Router to use in bound FECNs Forward Explicit Congestion Notification This feat
155. en on page 2 5 m The Operation Mode pull down menu allows you to select the type of SDSL ATM DSLAM to which you will be connecting Generic Lucent Nokia EOC Fast Nokia Fixed Paradyne Nortel UE IMAS or Newbridge 2 4 Firmware User Guide SDSL Line Configuration Line Type Operation Mode Generic Lucent Nokia EOC Fast Data Rate Mode Nokia Fixed Data Rate Paradyne Nortel UE IMAS Newbridge Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Routed 1483 Some of these selections will reset the defaults for the remaining options in this screen You will be challenged to confirm your choice The SDSL HDLC and IDSL Line Types do not offer these choices m The Data Rate Mode pull down menu allows you to select either Hunt or Locked mode m f you choose Hunt the router will cycle through the speeds available and attempt to connect at the highest available speed This hunt will take a few minutes When a negotiated speed is determined the router will remember that speed and use it as the starting point for the next time a connection is attempted m f you choose Locked the Data Rate you select in the next menu will always be used The Data Rate pull down menu allows you to select the data rate for your connection This is usually assigned by your Service provider m Your Data Link Encapsulation may be either PPP or RFC1483 as assigned by your Service Provider m f you are using PPP the PPP Mode menu offers
156. enerate RIP packets only to other rout ers capable of recognizing RIP v2 packets If you want to enable Multicast Forwarding select Multicast Forwarding and from the pop up menu choose the type that you want to enable See Multicast Forwarding on page 6 34 for detailed configuration If you enable Multicast Forwarding the next field IGMP Version appears You can choose v1 or v2 from the pop up menu Select Static Routes to manually configure IP routes See the section Static routes below If you select IP Address Serving you will be taken to the IP Address Serving screen see IP Address Serving on page 6 17 Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time make sure 6 4 Firmware User Guide that the addresses distributed by the Router and those that are manually configured are not the same Each method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw from IP subnets The IP Subnets screen allows you to configure up to eight Ethernet IP subnets on unlimited user models one primary subnet and up to seven secondary subnets by entering IP address subnet mask pairs IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet In that case you can continue to enter or edit the IP address and subnet mask for the single subnet on the IP Setup screen This screen disp
157. ents did Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP DHCP 00 59 EN 00 00 C5 70 00 04 DHCP 00 59 Bill s Pentium DHCP 00 45 Steve s Power Mac Lease Management The rightmost column displays the host name supplied by the client if one was provided otherwise it displays the client identifier If a host name is displayed the client identifier is still accessible in a Details pop up menu See below Note The server does not query the client for its host name Macintosh computers running versions of MacOS prior to MacOS version 8 5 OT 2 0 1 TCP IP 2 0 1 do not supply a host name option in their DHCP messages so no host name will appear in the Served IP Addresses list 6 26 Firmware User Guide You can select the entries in the Served IP Addresses screen Use the up and down arrow keys to move the selection to one of the entries in the list of served IP addresses Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 Details 192 168 Exclude 192 168 Release 192 168 Reserve 192 168 192 168 Lease Management Once you select an entry pressing Return displays an action pop up menu that lists operations that can be performed on that entry Possible operations are Details Exclude Include Release and Reserve The action popup is context sensitive and lists on
158. er if the connection is up 10 50 Firmware User Guide Utilities and Diagnostics 11 1 Chapter 11 Utilities and Diagnostics A number of utilities and tests are available for system diagnostic and control purposes This section covers the following topics m Ping on page 11 2 m Trace Route on page 11 4 m Telnet Client on page 11 5 m Factory Defaults on page 11 6 mw Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with TFTP on page 11 6 m Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with XMODEM on page 11 9 m Restarting the System on page 11 12 m T1 Line Statistics and Diagnostics on page 11 12 Note These utilities and tests are accessible only through the console based management screens See the Getting Started Guide chapter Console Based Management for information on accessing the console based management screens You access the Utilities amp Diagnostics screens from the Main Menu Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP X Modem File Transfer Restart System Revert to Factory Defaults 11 2 Firmware User Guide Ping The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 Router includes a standard Ping test utility A Ping test generates IP packets destined for a particular Ping capable IP host Each time the target host receives a Ping packet it returns a packet to the original sender Ping allows you
159. erfect Forward Secrecy will be used Enabling Perfect Forward Secrecy the default causes IKE to perform a new Diffie Hellman exchange with each Phase 2 re key Because the additional Diffie Hellman exchanges required for Perfect Forward Secrecy introduce additional overhead it may be good to disable Perfect Forward Secrecy when security does not require it Dead Peer Detection toggles whether or not the router will detect a remote peer being offline Enhanced Dead Peer Detection Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 adds a new Dead Peer Detection mechanism In previous firmware versions when Dead Peer Detection was enabled a counter would begin in the router when any traffic was sent through the tunnel Determination of a dead peer could take up to eight minutes Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 13 Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 provides a new Dead Peer Detection mechanism An IPsec IP net interface sends ICMP ping requests to a specific IP address on a Remote Member network The ping is periodic and the reply is expected within a certain amount of time If the ICMP reply does not arrive within that time the peer is considered dead the current phase 2 SAs are torn down and the IKE SA starts a new phase 1 negotiation followed by the normal phase 2 negotiation thereafter When you toggle Dead Peer Detection to Yes on new options appear Advanced IPsec Options SA Lifetime seconds 28800 SA Lifetime Kbytes 0 Perf
160. ersion 5 4 allows you to have a standard configuration that uses for example four VCs 0 35 0 38 8 35 8 38 pointing to the same profile The unit will now automatically select the active VC on networks with a VPI VCI of any of these four values without any custom configuration of the unit You must however manually create these VCs and associate them with the profile you desire You configure Virtual Circuits in the Add Change Circuit screen Main WAN ATM Circuits Menu Configuration Configuration WAN and System Configuration 2 17 ATM Circuits Configuration Show Change Circuit Add Circuit Delete Circuit 3 To add acircuit select Add Circuit and press Return The Add Circuit screen appears Add Circuit Circuit Name Circuit 2 Circuit Enabled Yes Circuit VPI 0 255 Circuit VCI 32 65535 Qos Peak Cell Rate 0 line rate Use Connection Profile Default Profile Use Default Profile for Circuit ADD Circuit NOW CANCEL m Enter a name for the circuit in the Circuit Name field m Toggle Circuit Enabled to Yes m Enter the Virtual Path Identifier and the Virtual Channel Identifier in the Circuit VPI and Circuit VCI fields respectively 2 18 Firmware User Guide Quality of Service QoS settings m Select the QoS Quality of Service setting from the pop up menu UBR or CBR UBR No configuration is needed for UBR VCs Leave the default value O maximum li
161. et Control Message Protocol TCP 6 Transmission Control Protocol UDP 17 User Datagram Protocol Src Port The source port to match This is the port on the sending host that originated the packet D Port The destination port to match This is the port on the receiving host for which the packet is intended On Displays Yes when the filter is in effect or No when it is not Fwd Shows whether the filter forwards Yes a packet or discards No it when there s a match 10 24 Firmware User Guide Filtering example 1 Returning to our filtering rule example from above see page 10 20 look at how a rule is translated into a filter Start with the rule then fill in the filter s attributes 1 The rule you want to implement as a filter is Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 2 The host 199 211 211 17 is the source of the Telnet packets you want to block while the destination address is any IP address How these IP addresses are masked determines what the final match will be although the mask is not displayed in the table that displays the filter sets you set it when you create the filter In fact since the mask for the destination IP address is 0 0 0 0 the address for Dest IP Addr could have been anything The mask for Source IP Addr must be 255 255 255 255 since an exact match is desired m Source IP Addr 199 211 211 17 m Source IP address mask 255 255 255 255 m Dest IP Addr
162. et the Router to Factory Defaults on page A 3 Console connection problems Can t see the configuration screens nothing appears m Make sure the cable connection from the Router s console port to the computer being used as a console is securely connected m Make sure the terminal emulation software is accessing the correct port on the computer that s being used as a console m Try pressing Ctrl L or Return or the up or down arrow key several times to refresh the terminal screen m Make sure that flow control on serial connections is turned off Junk characters appear on the screen m Check that the terminal emulation software is configured correctly m Check the baud rate The default values are 9600 N 8 and 1 Characters are missing from some of the configuration screens m Try changing the Router s default speed of 9600 bps and setting your terminal emulation software to match the new speed Network problems Problems communicating with remote IP hosts m Verify the accuracy of the default gateway s IP address entered in the IP Setup or Easy Setup screen m Use the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 s Ping utility in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen and try to Ping local and remote hosts See Ping on page 11 2 for instructions on how to use the Ping utility If you can successfully Ping hosts using their IP addresses but not their domain names 198 34 7 1 but not garcia netopia com for example verify
163. etwork Address Translation 3 5 Complex maps Map lists and server lists are completely independent of each other A Connection Profile can use one or the other or both MultiNAT allows complex mapping and requires more complex configuration than in earlier firmware versions Multiple mapped interior subnets are supported and the rules for mapping each of the subnets may be different The figure below illustrates a possible multiNAT configuration Public Addresses Private Addresses IP Host NAT Type 206 1 1 1 lt a 7 192 168 1 253 Web FTP Server 1 1 Static 206 1 1 2 lt amp _ gt x 192 168 1 254 E mail Server 1 1 Static 206 1 1 3 lt a 206 1 1 4 lt _ gt 1 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users 1 1 Dynamic 206 1 1 5 lt t X 4 206 1 1 6 lt 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users z 1 Many PAT 206 1 2 1 6 _ 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users 1 1 Dynamic possible later In order to support this type of mapping you define two address ranges First you define a public range which contains the first and last public address to be used and the way in which these addresses should be used PAT static or dynamic You then configure an address map which defines the private IP address or addresses to be used and which public range they should be mapped to You add the address map to the list of address maps which are configured creating a map list The mappings in the map list are order
164. etworking The following instructions tell you how to create the profile with the Make New Connection feature Do the following 1 Double click the My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop Open the Dial Up Networking folder and then double click Make New Connection The Make New Connection wizard window appears 2 Type aname for this connection such as the name of your company or the computer you are dialing into From the pull down menu select the device you intend to use for the virtual private network connection This can be any device you have installed or connected to your PC Click the Next button A screen appears with fields for you to enter telephone numbers for the computer you want to connect to 3 Type the directory number or the Virtual Circuit Identifier number This number is provided by your ISP or corporate administrator Depending on the type of device you are using the number may or may not resemble an ordinary telephone directory number 4 Click the Next button The final window will give you a chance to accept or change the name you have entered for this profile If you are Satisfied with it click the Finish button Your profile is complete 4 16 Firmware User Guide Configuring a Dial Up Networking profile Once you have created your Dial Up Networking profile you configure it for TCP IP networking to allow you to connect to the Internet through your Internet connection device Do
165. evice Event History screen lists a total of 128 port and system events giving the time and date for each event as well as a brief description The most recent events appear at the top 9 6 Firmware User Guide In the Statistics amp Logs screen select Device Event History The Device Event History screen appears Device Event History Current Date 10 11 2001 03 02 23 PM 01 22 02 IP address server initialization complete 01 22 02 BOOT Warm start v5 3 01 22 02 IP address server initialization complete 01 22 02 8 BOOT Warm start v5 3 01 22 02 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed 01 22 02 IP address server initialization complete 01 22 02 BOOT Cold start v5 3 01 22 02 07 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN To scroll up select SCROLL UP at the top of the list and press Return To scroll down select SCROLL DOWN at the bottom of the list and press Return To obtain more information about any event listed in the Device Event History select the event and then press Return A dialog box containing more information about the selected event appears Press Return or Escape to dismiss the dialog box To clear the Device Event History select Clear History and press Return Monitoring Tools 9
166. f 10 hosts is a subnet of the ISP s network Since the Class C address has already been reduced to subnets you cannot further subnet your network without the risk of creating network routing problems since you must use the mask issued by the ISP This however is not a problematic limitation for your small network The advantages of this situation are the greater ease and lower cost of obtaining a subnet rather than a full Class C address from an ISP Distributing IP Addresses To set up a connection to the Internet you may have obtained a block of IP host addresses from an ISP When configuring the Router you gave one of those addresses to its Ethernet port leaving a number of addresses to distribute to computers on your network B 6 Firmware User Guide There are two schemes for distributing the remaining IP addresses m Manually give each computer an address m Let the Router automatically distribute the addresses These two methods are not mutually exclusive you can manually issue some of the addresses while the rest are distributed by the Router Using the router in this way allows it to function as an address server One reason to use the Router as an address server is that it takes less time than manually distributing the addresses This is particularly true if you have many addresses to distribute You need to enter information only once rather than having to enter it on each host separately This also reduces the potential for m
167. f any of the following conditions are true m The static route s Next Gateway IP Address matches an IP address in the range of IP addresses being distributed by DHCP m The static route s Next Gateway IP Address is determined to be unreachable by the Router m The static route s route information conflicts with a connection profile s route information m The connection profile associated with the static route has a disabled dial on demand setting and there is no current connection using that connection profile A static route that is already installed in the IP routing table will be removed if any of the conditions listed above become true for that static route However an enabled static route is automatically reinstalled once the conditions listed above are no longer true for that static route 6 10 Firmware User Guide RIP 2 MD5 Authentication Firmware version 5 3 7 supports RIP 2 MD5 Authentication RFC2082 Routing Internet Protocol Version 2 Message Digest 5 The purpose of MD5 authentication is to provide an additional level of confidence that a RIP packet received was generated by a reliable source In other words MD5 authentication provides an enhanced level of security that information that your PC receives does not originate from a malicious source posing as part of your network Overview All participants in an authenticated RIP environment on a network must share an identifier key There is no key exchange protocol l
168. figuration 2 43 console based management configuring with 1 2 2 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR 2 18 D D port 10 23 Data Encryption Standard DES 4 10 date and time setting 2 42 dead peer detection 5 12 Default Profile 2 28 default profile 2 28 default terminal emulation software set tings 1 6 delete static route 6 9 DES 4 3 4 7 5 1 designing a new filter set 10 25 DHCP defined B 8 DHCP Lease 6 18 DHCP NetBIOS options 6 22 DHCP Relay Agent 6 30 diagnostics T1 11 12 display static routes 6 7 distributing IP addresses B 5 downloading configuration files 11 8 11 Index 2 11 with TFTP 11 8 with XMODEM 11 11 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 6 17 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP Dynamic WAN 6 17 E Easy Setup navigating 1 7 encryption 4 3 4 7 4 10 5 1 event history device 9 5 WAN 9 5 Exposed Addresses 2 40 F filter parts 10 21 parts of 10 21 filter priority 10 19 filter set adding 10 27 display 10 23 filter sets adding 10 27 defined 10 18 deleting 10 31 disadvantages 10 25 sample Basic Firewall 10 31 using 10 26 filtering example 1 10 24 filters actions a filter can take 10 20 adding to a filter set 10 28 defined 10 18 deleting 10 31 disadvantages of 10 25 input 10 28 modifying 10 30 output 10 28 using 10 26 viewing 10 30 firewall 10 31 firmware files updating with TFTP 11 7 updating with XMODEM 11 10 FTP sessions 10 34 G G SHDSL Line Configuration 2 6 general statistics
169. g box asks you to confirm your choice Show Change NAT Server List Internal Address External Address Port Are you sure you want to delete this Server CONTINUE Choose CONTINUE and press Return The server is deleted from the list Multiple Network Address Translation 3 21 Binding Map Lists and Server Lists Once you have created your map lists and server lists for most Netopia Router models you must bind them to a profile either a Connection Profile or the Default Profile You do this in one of the following screens m the IP profile parameters screen See below of the Connection Profile configuration menu m the IP Parameters WAN Default Profile screen See page 3 23 of the Default Profile configuration menu m the Binding Map Lists and Server Lists screen See page 3 21 IP profile parameters To bind a map list to a Connection Profile from the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen then the Display Change Connection Profile screen From the pop up menu list of your Connection Profiles choose the one you want to bind your map list to Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return Main WAN Display Change IP Profile Menu Configuration Connection Profile Parameters The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Unnumbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers
170. guration information for the host computers at many remote sites at a single location easing the burden of administering configuration management for remote sites To configure the Netopia Router to act as a DHCP relay agent from the Main Menu navigate to the System Configuration menu Main System IP Address Menu Configuration Serving IP Setup 6 31 Select IP Address Serving and press Return The IP Address Serving screen appears IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode Disabled DHCP Server Number of Client IP Addresses DHCP Relay Agent lst Client Address Client Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Serve DHCP Clients Yes DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Yes Select IP Address Serving Mode The pop up menu offers the choices of Disabled DHCP Server the default and DHCP Relay Agent If you select DHCP Relay Agent and press Return the screen changes as shown below IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode DHCP Relay Agent Relay Server 1 10 1 1 1 Relay Server 2 20 1 1 1 Relay Server 3 30 1 1 1 Configure Address Serving DHCP BOOTP etc here Now you can enter the IP address es of your remote DHCP server s such as might be located in your company s corporate headquarters Each time you enter an IP address and press Return an additional field appears You can enter up to four DHCP server addresses In the example above DHCP requests from cl
171. hapter 6 IP Setup The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 uses Internet Protocol IP to communicate both locally and with remote networks This chapter shows you how to configure the router to route IP traffic You also learn how to configure the router to serve IP addresses to hosts on your local network Netopia s IP routing features Network Address Translation and IP address serving This section covers the following topics m IP Setup on page 6 2 m RIP 2 MD5 Authentication on page 6 10 m IP Address Serving on page 6 17 m More Address Serving Options on page 6 24 m DHCP Relay Agent on page 6 30 m Connection Profiles on page 6 32 m Multicast Forwarding on page 6 34 Network Address Translation allows communication between the LAN connected to the Router and the Internet using a single or a few IP address es instead of a routed account with separate IP addresses for each computer on the network Network Address Translation also provides increased security by hiding the local IP addresses of the LAN connected to the Netopia routers from the outside world The setup is simpler so ISPs typically offer Internet accounts supporting Network Address Translation at a significant cost savings For a detailed discussion of Network Address Translation see Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation 6 2 Firmware User Guide IP Setup Main System Menu Configuration pm IP Se
172. has an information element to indicate which gateway is in use Quick View 1 29 2002 01 05 35 PM Default IP Gateway 0 0 p adiz Primary DNS Server 0 0 Gateway installed Backup 0 0 i a i Secondary DNS Server 7 18 Firmware User Guide Voice Configuration 8 1 Chapter 8 Voice Configuration This chapter describes the telephony services and configuration of the Netopia 4700 Series Integrated Access Devices IADs running Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 This chapter covers the following topics m Introduction on page 8 1 m Configuring the Voice Features on page 8 2 Introduction Netopia IADs provide small and medium sized businesses with a complete Centrex PBX system It supports voice call switching between the DSL link and eight local extensions Call management features can include distinctive ringing intelligent call forwarding Direct Inward Dial DID Caller ID and hunt groups Important key system features such as call hold call transfer and call waiting are all supported Note Since the Netopia IADs are Centrex based specific voice features available to you in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 will depend on the services for which you contract with your service provider Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports up to eight telephone extensions and up to eight derived voice lines The 4700 Series IAD family includes the Netopia data routing engine for any number of attached computers or other network de
173. hase 1 Profile If an IKE Phase 1 Profile is not assigned to an IKE Connection Profile all VPN traffic for that profile will be discarded Select ADD PH1 PROFILE The Add IKE Phase 1 Profile screen appears Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs _ 5 5 Add IKE Phase 1 Profile Profile Name IKE Profile 1 Mode Aggressive Mode Local Identity Type IPv4 Address Local Identity Value 0 0 0 0 Remote Identity Type IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 Remote Identity Value Authentication Method Shared Secret Shared Secret kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Encryption Algorithm des Hash Algorithm md5 Diffie Hellman Group Group 2 1024 bits Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options ADD IKE PHASE 1 PROFILE The Profile Name field accepts any name of up to 16 characters Sixteen IKE Phase 1 profiles are supported since each of the potential sixteen Connection Profiles may be associated with a separate IKE Phase 1 profile The Mode pop up menu allows you to choose between Main Mode the default and Aggressive Mode In Main Mode the router hides the Local and Remote Identity Type and Value fields defaults to the host address and always uses the IPV4 Address and the local and remote tunnel endpoint address In Aggressive Mode the Local and Remote Identity Type pop up menus allow you to choose the type of Identity value to use IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet IPv4 Range Host Name E Mail Address Key ID ASCII and Key ID HEX Th
174. he bottom right on each screen until you return to the Control Panel Close the Control Panel by clicking the upper right corner X Double click the My Computer icon normally at the left upper corner of the screen This will display the devices within My Computer Scroll down the list to Dial Up Networking and double click it Double click Make New Connection This displays the Make New Connection installation screen In this screen you will see a box labelled Select a device From the pull down menu to the right select Microsoft VPN Adapter Click the Next button at the bottom of the screen This displays the VPN Host screen In the box to the top center of the screen enter your VPN server s IP address for example 192 168 xxx xxx This is not a proper Internet address Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 19 Connecting using Dial Up Networking A Dial Up Networking connection will be automatically launched whenever you run a TCP IP application such as a web browser or email client When you first run the application a Connect To dialog box appears in which you enter your User name and Password If you check the Save password checkbox the system will remember your User name and Password and you won t be prompted for them again Allowing VPNs through a Firewall An administrator interested in securing a network will usually combine the use of VPNs with the use of a firewall or some similar mechanism This is because a VPN is not a c
175. he transfer is complete CONTINUE m Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new firmware into effect While the system resets the LEDs will blink on and off Caution m Be sure the firmware update you load onto your router is the correct version for your particular model Some models do not support all firmware versions Loading an incorrect firmware version can permanently damage the unit m Do not manually power down or reset the Router while it is automatically resetting or it could be damaged m f you choose to download the firmware the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Firmware The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Downloading configuration files The Router can be configured by downloading a configuration file using TFTP Once downloaded the file reconfigures all of the router s parameters as if someone had manually done so through the console port To download a configuration file follow these steps Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located Select Config File Name and enter the name of the file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need t
176. hen VPN QuickView Main F VPN Menu QuickView QuickView The VPN QuickView screen appears VPN Quick View Profile Name Type Rx Pckts Tx Pckts RxDiscard Remote Address HA lt gt FAl Jony Fon ATMP 99 99 0 173 166 82 8 HA lt gt FA3 Sleve M ATMP 13 14 0 173 166 117 91 Profile Name Lists the name of the Connection Profile being used if any Type Shows the data link encapsulation method PPTP or ATMP Rx Pckts Shows the number of packets received via the VPN tunnel Tx Pckts Shows the number of packets transmitted via the VPN tunnel Rx Discard Shows the number of packets discarded Remote Address Shows the tunnel partner s IP address 4 14 Firmware User Guide Dial Up Networking for VPN Microsoft Windows Dial Up Networking software permits a remote standalone workstation to establish a VPN tunnel to a PPTP server such as a Netopia Router located at a central site Dial Up Networking also allows a mobile user who may not be connected to a PAC to dial into an intermediate ISP and establish a VPN tunnel to for example a corporate headquarters remotely Netopia Routers also can serve as a PAC at the workstation s site making it unnecessary for the standalone workstation to initiate the tunnel In such a case the Dial Up Networking software is not required since the Netopia Router initiates the tunnel This section is provided for users who may require the VPN clie
177. htly IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode DHCP Server Configure Address Pools Serve DHCP Clients DHCP Lease Time Hours DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Three menu items are hidden and Configure Address Pools appears instead If you select Configure Address Pools you will be taken to the IP Address Pools screen that allows you to configure an address serving pool for each of the configured Ethernet IP subnets See IP Address Pools on page 6 20 6 20 Firmware User Guide IP Address Pools The IP Address Pools screen allows you to configure a separate IP address serving pool for each of up to eight configured Ethernet IP subnets IP Address Pools Subnet host addrs lst Client Addr Clients Client Gateway 192 128 117 0 253 192 128 117 196 192 128 117 162 192 129 117 0 253 192 129 117 110 192 129 117 4 This screen consists of between two and eight rows of four columns each There are exactly as many rows as there are Ethernet IP subnets configured on the IP Subnets screen The Subnet host addrs column is non selectable and non editable It indicates the network address of the Ethernet IP subnet for which an address pool is being configured and the number of host addresses available on the subnet The network address is equal to the router s IP address on the subnet bitwise ANDed with the subnet mask The host address count is equal to the subne
178. ice to which you will be connected The choices are CopperCom JetStream TollBridge TDSoft Zhone or Alcatel Select Ring Cadence and press Return A pop up menu allows you to choose between 20Hz the default 25Hz or 50Hz for compliance with several non North American telephone systems Selecting Port Configuration displays the Port Configuration screen Port Configuration Port 1 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 2 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 3 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 4 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 5 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 6 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 7 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Port 8 Echo Cancellation Enabled Yes Compression is G726 Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels 8 4 Firmware User Guide Echo cancellation is set to Yes by default For ordinary telephone handsets echo cancellation should be set to Yes turned on to eliminate echoes on the voice line Toggling a port to No allows you to connect a fax machine or modem to the phone port since fax machines and modems automatically cancel echoes If you want to disable echo cancellation toggle this item to No You can enable or disable echo cancellation for each telephone port m The Compression type is normally set at the voice gateway It is visible for inf
179. ick View Status Overview on page 9 1 Netopia Models This Firmware User Guide covers all of the Netopia 4000 Series Router and IAD models However some information in this guide will only apply to a specific model Screen differences Because different Netopia 4000 Series models offer many different features and interfaces the options shown on some screens in this Firmware User Guide may not appear on your own particular model s console screen These differences are noted throughout the manual 1 4 Firmware User Guide Connecting through a Telnet Session Features of the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 can be configured through the console screens Before you can access the console screens through Telnet you must have m A network connection locally to the router or IP access to the router Note Alternatively you may have a direct serial console cable connection using a provided console cable and the Console port on the back of the router Some models do not have a console port For more information on attaching the console cable see Connecting a Console Cable to your Equipment on page 1 5 m Telnet software installed on the computer you will use to configure the router Configuring Telnet software If you are configuring your device using a Telnet session your computer must be running a Telnet software program m If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows you can use a Windows Telnet application or simply run Telne
180. ide DHCP NetBIOS Options If your network uses NetBIOS you can enable the Router to use DHCP to distribute NetBIOS information NetBIOS stands for Network Basic Input Output System It is a layer of software originally developed by IBM and Sytek to link a network operating system with specific hardware NetBIOS has been adopted as an industry standard It offers LAN applications a variety of hooks to carry out inter application communications and data transfer Essentially NetBIOS is a way for application programs to talk to the network To run an application that works with NetBIOS a non IBM network operating system or network interface card must offer a NetBIOS emulator Many vendors either provide a version of NetBIOS to interface with their hardware or emulate its transport layer communications services in their network products A NetBIOS emulator is a program provided by NetWare clients that allow workstations to run applications that support IBM s NetBIOS calls m Select DHCP NetBIOS Options and press Return The DHCP NetBIOS Options screen appears DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve NetBIOS Type Yes NetBIOS Type Type B Serve NetBIOS Scope No NetBIOS Scope Serve NetBIOS Name Server No NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Configure DHCP served NetBIOS options here m To serve DHCP clients with the type of NetBIOS used on your network select Serve NetBIOS Type and toggle it to Yes IP Setup 6 23 m From the NetBIO
181. ients are automatically enabled The IP Address Serving Mode pop up menu allows you to choose the way in which the Router will serve IP addresses The device can act as either a DHCP Server or a DHCP Relay Agent See DHCP Relay Agent on page 6 30 for more information In most cases you will use the device to serve its own pool of IP addresses hence DHCP Server is the default Address serving can also be disabled Select Number of Client IP Addresses and enter the total number of contiguous IP addresses that the Router will distribute to the client machines on your local area network Twelve user models are limited to twelve IP addresses In the screen example shown above five Client IP addresses have been allocated Select 1st Client Address and enter the first client IP address that you will allocate to your first client machine For instance on your local area network you may want to first figure out which machines are going to be allocated specific static IP addresses so that you can determine the pool of IP addresses that you will be serving addresses from via DHCP BootP and or Dynamic WAN Example Your ISP has given your Router the IP address 192 168 6 137 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 248 The subnet mask allocated will give you six IP addresses to use when connecting to the ISP over the Internet Your address range will be from 137 143 In this example you would enter 192 168 6 138 as the 1st Client Address since th
182. ients on the LAN will be relayed to the DHCP servers at IP addresses 10 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 and 30 1 1 1 6 32 Firmware User Guide Note The remote DHCP server s to which the Netopia Router is relaying DHCP requests must be capable of servicing relayed requests Not all DHCP servers support this feature For example the DHCP server in the Netopia Router does not The DHCP server s to which the Netopia Router is relaying DHCP requests must be configured with one or more address pools that are within the Netopia Router s primary Ethernet LAN subnet There is no mechanism for DHCP clients to receive an address on a secondary subnet via a relayed DHCP request Connection Profiles Since you will probably only have a single connection to your ISP over the remote link you may not need to create multiple connection profiles Additional profiles may be useful for creating VPNs Connection Profiles define the line and networking protocols necessary for the router to make a remote connection A connection profile is like an address book entry describing how the router is to get to a remote site or how to recognize and authenticate a remote user connecting to the router To create a new Connection Profile you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select Add Connection Profile Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration Profile The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Conne
183. ike IKE so all keys must be manually entered by an administrator RIP 2 MD5 Authentication requires that an interface configured to receive authenticated packets ignore unau thenticated packets or packets authenticated with an invalid key An interface that is not configured for receiving authenticated packets ignores authenticated ones On a Netopia router every interface will be allowed to have up to two keys RIP 2 MD5 authentication can be configured on the Ethernet LAN all models Ethernet WAN models Connection Profiles and the Default Profile Keys can have lifetimes defined as a start date and time and an end date and time or infinite Key management Typically you configure only one key on a given interface and all of the interfaces that interact with that interface RIP updates are sent every 30 seconds Each RIP packet is authenticated using one key and sent When the Netopia router receives an authenticated RIP packet from a device it keeps track of that device peer The longer it is in use a single key becomes less secure Therefore RFC2082 specifies that an interface must support at least two keys per interface to allow a transition from an old key to a new key It is recommended that you specify an overlapping time of five minutes for transitioning from one key to the next Whenever two keys are valid at the same time the Netopia router tries to determine if other peers devices that it has received an authenticated packe
184. in ea 10 17 About Filters and Filter Set icccsccsicicsccenvsadscvccsacsvacesacets 10 18 What s a filter and what s a filter Set 5 10 18 HOW filter Sets WOM cccesecccctcscscsdvcacenseessesencecsanex 10 18 How individual filters WOrk cceseeeeeeeseeeeeneees 10 20 D sign SUIASIINGS nirin 10 25 Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets ccceeeeceeeees 10 26 Adding a fiter Setasirupi cireni una 10 27 Deleting a filter set cccceseceseseeeseseneneseneneees 10 31 A sample filter S t ccccceceececeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 10 31 Policy based Routing using Filtersets cccsceseeeeeees 10 34 TOS field MAGN G scccevenccadatncincecioreciaemnatsadtbaurcaack 10 35 Firewall Tutorial orcecaccetectcda seccxseedoteswie ee anai 10 37 General firewall TEMS secsivcccicnssecsnsoinsnecmsstecnncuns 10 37 Basic IP packet COMpONENTS ccececceeeeeeees 10 37 Basic Protocol type S sssrinin urn 10 37 Firewall design rUlES cccsicceccscdscseentsncceinadscasioanenens 10 38 Fiter DA SICS wieamcurin te cnancacicxanioncaacamesseteienedaeencasedeus 10 40 Example TIRGIS cenaa E 10 41 Configuration Management s sssssssssssessusseuresssesensses 10 44 TRIP and X MOGE MM wssieesatvsscestiicdecintatetecnsheatiaines 10 47 Call FEINE sorasa a E 10 48 Chapter 11 Utilities and Diagnostics cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 1 PUPS sek oreececavcrereectesiausaxe este A A E AE E E T 11 2 Mace ROUTO es icccc
185. ined when a client to whom the DHCP server offers the address declines the address A client declines an address if it determines that a leased address is already in use by another device Selecting Include restores the selected IP address to the address serving pool so that the IP address is once again eligible to be served to a client m Release is displayed if the entry is currently offered leased or reserved Selecting Release puts the selected entry in the available state You will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation since the IP address is in use There is no mechanism to notify the client to whom the address is leased that the lease has been terminated Thus the client will continue to use the address until the next time it attempts to renew its lease In the interim the server may lease the same IP address to a different client thereby creating an address conflict For this reason releasing an address that is actively being used by a client is generally not recommended m Reserve is displayed if the entry is available declined excluded leased offered or reserved Reserving an IP address for a client with a particular Ethernet MAC address guarantees that a client with the specified MAC address will be offered or leased the specified IP address Moreover it prevents the specified IP address from being offered or leased to any other client Selecting Reserve displays a pop up dialog box that
186. information on creating Connection Profiles Channel 4 and higher events such as connections and disconnections reported in the WAN Event Histories are VPN tunnel events To define a PPTP tunnel navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration Profile Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Data Link Encapsulation Frame Relay RFC1483 ATMP IP Profile Parameters PPTP Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 5 When you define a Connection Profile as using PPTP by selecting PPTP as the datalink encapsulation method and then select Data Link Options the PPTP Tunnel Options screen appears PPTP Tunnel Options PPTP Partner IP Address 173 167 8 134 Tunnel Via Gateway 0 0 0 0 Authentication CHAP Data Compression None Send Host name tony Send Password KKKEK Receive Host name kimba Receive Password KKK KK Initiate Connections Yes On Demand Yes Optional Windows NT Domain Name Idle Timeout seconds m Enter the PPTP Partner IP Address This specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address the gateway cannot initiate tunnels i e act as a PPTP Access Concentrator PAC for this profile It can only accept tunnel requests as a PPTP Network Server PNS m f you specify the PPTP Partner IP Address and the address is i
187. install it from your system disks or CDROM Do the following 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel window double click the Add Remove Programs icon The Add Remove Programs Properties window appears Click the Windows Setup tab Double click Communications Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 15 The Communications window appears Communications x To add or remove a component click the check box A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components F Dial Up Networking M 32 Direct Cable Connection 0 5 MB M S HyperTerminal 0 6 MB M amp Phone Dialer 0 2 MB f Space required 1 3 MB Space available on disk 508 8 MB Description Enables you to connect to other computers by using a modem Desie Cancel 5 In the Communications window select Dial Up Networking and click the OK button This returns you to the Windows Setup screen Click the OK button Respond to the prompts to install Dial Up Networking from the system disks or CDROM When prompted reboot your PC Creating a new Dial Up Networking profile A Dial Up Networking profile is like an address book entry that contains the information and parameters you need for a secure private connection You can create this profile by using either the Internet Connection Wizard or the Make New Connection feature of Dial Up N
188. ion You name the saved configurations giving you a reference for identifying each one The naming operation occurs when you decide to save a configuration or when downloading a configuration via TFTP or X Modem The configurations that are saved will persist across a Factory Default soft or NMI The router will reboot with a Factory Defaulted configuration as usual but the saved configurations are still available for use You save your configurations in the Configuration Management screen in the Security menus Security Options Enable Telnet Console Access Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens Console Access timeout seconds Superuser Configuration Adua On Configuration Management Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Select Configuration Management and press Return The Configuration Management screen appears Security 10 45 Configuration Management Save Current Configuration as Replace Existing Conifiguration Boot from a Configuration Delete a Configuration Select Save Current Configuration as and press Return The Save Current Configuration screen appears Save Current Configuration Configuration Name HappyInternet SAVE CANCEL eturn accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Enter a descriptive name for your current configuration select SAVE and press Return Your configuration will be saved to the flash memory and you will
189. is usable for example when using PPP or PPPoE the DHCP subnet configuration will default to a class C subnet mask Globally only one dynamically configured DHCP subnet is available If you configure multiple Connection Profiles to use IP Passthrough s DHCP option when any of these profiles is established the dynamic DHCP configuration will be overwritten In the case of an Ethernet WAN router the IP passthrough configuration is located in the WAN Ethernet Configuration menu For all other routers it is located in the Connection Profiles IP Profile Parameters The WAN Ethernet Configuration screen found under the WAN Configuration menu WAN Setup screen appears as shown WAN Ethernet Configuration Address Translation Enabled Yes Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Filter Set Remove Filter Set Enable PPP over Ethernet Off WAN Ethernet Speed Setting Auto Negotiation Wan Ethernet MAC Address 00 fc de fa dd 02 DHCP Client Mode Standards Based RIP Options Set up the basic IP attributes of your Ethernet Module in this screen 3 28 Firmware User Guide The IP Profile Parameters screen found under the WAN Configuration menu Add Change Connection Profile screen appears as shown IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT
190. is shown below Tl Line Configuration Operation Mode HDLC Line Encoding B8ZS Framing Mode Transmit ANSI PRMs AutoDetect DSO Channels Number of DSO Channels First DSO Channel Buildout dB Channel Data Rate Nx64k Data Link Encapsulation Frame Relay PPP over Frame Relay Enabled Off Return Enter goes to new screen Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company m Select Operation Mode and press Return From the pop up menu highlight the mode your telephone service provider uses HDLC Cisco CM HDLC Copper Mountain or ATM The default setting is HDLC Press Return m Select Line Encoding and press Return From the pop up menu highlight the encoding your telephone service provider uses B8ZS or AMI The default setting is B8ZS Press Return m Select Framing Mode and press Return From the pop up menu highlight either ESF or D4 depending on the framing mode that your telephone service provider advises you to use The default setting is ESF Press Return m f you selected ESF framing mode toggle Transmit ANSI PRMs either No the default or Yes If you selected D4 framing mode this option is not available m Select AutoDetect DSO Channels Netopia routers whose model number ends in T may be able to use the auto detection feature Toggle this item to Yes if your service provider uses equipment that supports DSO channel auto detection Otherwise accept the default No m
191. isconfiguring hosts Another reason to use the Router as an address server is that it will distribute addresses only to hosts that need to use them All Routers come with an integrated Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP server Some routers also come with a Macintosh Internet Protocol MaclIP server These servers provide a means of distributing IP addresses to either a Mac or PC workstation as needed When setting up the DHCP or MacIP servers in the Router it is necessary to understand how workstations lease renew and release their IP addresses This information is helpful in determining dynamic address allocation for a network The term lease describes the action of a workstation requesting and using an IP address The address is dynamic and can be returned to the address pool at a later time The term renew refers to what the workstations do to keep their leased IP address At certain intervals the workstation talks to the DHCP or MaclIP server and renews the lease on that IP address This renewal allows the workstation to keep and use the assigned IP address until the next renewal period The term release refers to a situation where the workstation is no longer using its assigned IP address or has been shut down IP addresses can be manually released as well The IP address goes back into the DHCP or MaclIP address pool to be reassigned to another workstation as needed Technical note on subnet masking Note The
192. item or open a pop up menu of options for a selected item like entering an upgrade key Return or Enter Change a toggle value Yes No On Off Tab Restore an entry or toggle value to its previous value Esc Move one item up Up arrow or Control K Move one item down Down arrow or Control O Display a dump of the device event log Control E Display a dump of the WAN event log Control F Refresh the screen Control L To help you find your way to particular screens some sections in this guide begin with a graphical path guide similar to the following example Main System Menu g Configuration gt IP Setup This particular path guide shows how to get to the Network Protocols Setup screens The path guide represents these steps 1 Beginning in the Main Menu select System Configuration and press Return The System Configuration screen appears 2 Select IP Setup and press Return The IP Setup screen appears To go back in this sequence of screens use the Escape key 1 8 Firmware User Guide WAN and System Configuration 2 1 Chapter 2 WAN and System Configuration This chapter describes how to use the console based management screens to access and configure advanced features of your equipment You can customize these features for your individual setup These menus provide a powerful method for experienced users to set up their route
193. ive RIP Transmit RIP RIP v2 Authentication Keys v2 broadcast v2 multicast v2 MD5 broadcast v2 MD5 multicast RIP v2 Authentication Keys is visible only if v2 MD5 Authentication is enabled for either Receive or IP Setup 6 13 Transmit RIP Note e All of the changes on this menu require a reboot This is unique to the Ethernet LAN RIP changes on all other interfaces are immediately effective e f you set the RIP Receive option to Both v1 and v2 the interface will ignore authenticated RIP packets since authenticated v1 packets do not exist Only v2 packets can be authenticated m Select RIP v2 Authentication Keys The RIP v2 Authentication Keys screen appears RIP v2 Authentication Keys Display Change Key Add Key Delete Key 6 14 Firmware User Guide Adding a key Select Add Key The Add Key Screen appears Key ID Authentication Key Start Date MM DD YY 10 10 2002 Start Time hh mm 12 00 AM or PM AM End Time Mode Date End Date MM DD YY 10 10 2002 End Time hh mm 12 00 AM or PM AM m The key identifier Key ID can be any numeric value from O 255 and must be unique per interface You can not have two keys with the same key ID on an interface m The Authentication Key may consist of from 1 16 ASCII characters These appear as asterisks when typed The Start Date and End Date formats are determined by the System Date Format set on the
194. king at the bottom of the list Click OK at the bottom right on each screen until you return to the Control Panel Close the Control Panel by clicking the upper right corner X Double click the My Computer icon normally at the left upper corner of the screen This will display the devices within My Computer Scroll down the list to Dial Up Networking and double click it Double click Make New Connection This displays the Make New Connection installation screen In this screen you will see a box labelled Select a device From the pull down menu to the right select Microsoft VPN Adapter Click the Next button at the bottom of the screen This displays the VPN Host screen In the box to the top center of the screen enter your VPN server s IP address for example 192 168 xxx xxx This is not a proper Internet address Windows 98 VPN installation 1 From the Windows 98 Start menu select Settings then Control Panel and click once The Control Panel screen appears Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs screen appears Click the Windows Setup tab The Windows Setup screen will be displayed within the top center box Double click Communications This displays a list of possible selections for the communications option Active components will have a check in the checkboxes to their left Check Dial Up Networking at the top of the list and Virtual Private Networking at the bottom of the list Click OK at t
195. l a Security Association is established Previously the remote members network was displayed WAN Event History Error Reporting The following events are logged and displayed in the WAN Event History screen IKE no phi preferences assigned An attempt was made to use an IPsec profile with no IKE profile attached to it IKE DNS lookup failure The DNS lookup of the remote tunnel end point has failed IKE no matching ph1 profile An IKE phase 1 request was received and did not match any of the profiles stored in the local router IKE no matching proposal IKE phase 1 auth failure An IKE phase 1 request was received and the proposal did not match an allowed parameter or else the remote rejected the local router s proposal The phase 1 remote authentication failed IKE phase 1 resend timeout The attempt to resend the phase 1 remote authentication timed out IKE phase 1 complete IKE phase 2 hash failure The phase 1 negotiation completed successfully The phase 2 hash failed because the data received is out of date or has been tampered with 5 22 Firmware User Guide IKE no matching ph2 proposal Either the local router rejected the proposals of the remote or the remote rejected the local router s IKE ph2 resend timeout The attempt to resend the phase 2 authentication timed out IKE phase 2 complete The phase 2 negotiation completed successfully IP Setup 6 1 C
196. l be set to match the receiving signal level m Select Channel Data Rate and highlight the data rate specified by your service provider The channel data rate choices are Nx56k or Nx64k The default is Nx64k Press Return Select Data Link Encapsulation and highlight the method of encapsulation that you want to use from the pop up menu The choices offered are PPP HDLC Cisco RFC 1483 and Frame Relay The default setting is Frame Relay Press Return The screen will offer different options depending on your selection Frame Relay Options PPP Options T1 Line Configuration T1 Line Configuration Operation Mode Normal Operation Mode Normal Line Encoding B8ZS Line Encoding B8ZS Framing Mode ESF Framing Mode ESF Number of DSO Channels First DSO Channel Number of DSO Channels First DSO Channel 1 1 T 1 Channel Data Rate Nx64k Channel Data Rate Nx64k Data Link Encapsulation Frame Relay Data Link Encapsulation PPP PPP over Frame Relay Enabled On PPP Mode vc Multiplexed DLCI 16 LMI None TO MAIN MENU NEXT SCREEN TO MAIN MENU NEXT SCREEN return Enter takes you back to previous screen return Enter takes you back to previous screen nter Information supplied to you by your telephone company nter Information supplied to you by your telephone company RFC 1483 Options ATM Operation Mode Options T1 Line Configuration T1 Line Configuration Operation Mode Normal Operation Mode ATM
197. lays up to eight rows of two editable columns preceded by a row number between one and eight If you have eight subnets configured there will be eight rows on this screen Otherwise there will be one more row than the number of configured subnets The last row will have the value 0 0 0 0 in both the IP address and subnet mask fields to indicate that you can edit the values in this row to configure an additional subnet All eight row labels are always visible regardless of the number of subnets configured m To add an IP subnet enter the Router s IP address on the subnet in the IP Address field in a particular row and the subnet mask for the subnet in the Subnet Mask field in that row IP Setup 6 5 For example IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 192 128 152 162 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m To delete a configured subnet set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0 0 0 0 either explicitly or by clearing each field and pressing Return to commit the change When a configured subnet is deleted the values in subsequent rows adjust up to fill the vacant fields The subnets configured on this screen are tied to the address serving pools configured on the IP Address Pools screen and that changes on this screen may affect the IP Address Pools screen In particular deleting a subnet configured on this screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool if any on the IP Address Pools screen
198. le If your ISP is serving you a dynamic IP Address you need not explicitly configure a connection profile and the default behavior of the router will be to connect automatically once it is powered on WAN and System Configuration 2 29 IP parameters default profile screen If you are using RFC1483 datalink encapsulation the IP Parameters Default Profile screen allows you to configure various IP parameters for DSL connections established without an explicitly configured connection profile IP Parameters Default Profile Address Translation Enabled Filter Set Firewall Remove Filter Set Receive RIP Transmit RIP Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels For an DSL link Network Address Translation NAT is disabled by default in the Default Profile You can enable it by toggling to Yes For details on setting up IP Parameters see IP Setup on page 6 2 Scheduled Connections Scheduled connections are useful for PPPoE PPTP and ATMP connection profiles To go to the Scheduled Connections screen from the WAN Configuration screen select Advanced Connection Options and then select Scheduled Connections Main WAN Advanced Scheduled Menu Configuration Connection Options gt Connections 2 30 Firmware User Guide Scheduled Connections Display Change Scheduled Connection Add Scheduled Connection Delete Scheduled Connection Navigate from here to add modify
199. liary port on any router including leased line Netopia routers Understanding IP Addressing B 9 In any situation where a device is dialing into a Netopia router the router may need to be configured to serve IP via the WAN interface This is only a requirement if the calling device has not been configured locally to know what its address es are So when a client dialing into a Netopia router s WAN interface is expecting addresses to be served by the answering router you must set the answering Netopia router to serve IP via its WAN interface You can do this in either of two ways use the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients option in the Address Serving Setup screen Enabling Serve Dynamic WAN Clients only allows you to specify a pool of addresses from which the dial in client may get an IP address It does not allow static addressing If you want to serve addresses dynamically use Serve Dynamic WAN Clients define the address that you want to serve in the Connection Profile s IP Setup screen This method requires a static value to be used Thus any user dialing in can obtain the same IP address for every connection to the profile If you want to serve addresses statically define the address in the Connection Profile Notes m The addresses that are to be served cannot be used elsewhere For example you wouldn t want to define a static address in a Connection Profile to be served via the WAN that is already defined in the DHCP pool of addresses
200. live TTL value for each Ping packet sent by the Router is 255 the maximum allowed The TTL value defines the number of IP routers that the packet can traverse Ping packets that reach their TTL value are dropped and a destination unreachable notification is returned to the sender see the table on the previous page This ensures that no infinite routing loops occur The TTL value can be set and retrieved using the SNMP MIB II ip group s ipDefaultTTL object Trace Route You can count the number of routers between your Netopia Router and a given destination with the Trace Route utility In the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen select Trace Route and press Return The Trace Route screen appears Trace Route Host Name or IP Address Maximum Hops Timeout seconds Use Reverse DNS Yes START TRACE ROUTE Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host Trace route to a network host To trace a route follow these steps 1 Select Host Name or IP Address and enter the name or address of the destination you want to trace 2 Select Maximum Hops to set the maximum number of routers to count between the Netopia Router and the destination router up to the maximum of 64 The default is 30 hops Utilities and Diagnostics 11 5 3 Select Timeout seconds to set when the trace will timeout for each hop up to 10 seconds The default is 3 seconds 4 Select Use Reverse DNS to learn the names of the routers between the Netopi
201. llback and general awareness of how your network may be vulnerable 10 26 Firmware User Guide An approach to using filters The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized access to the network without compromising authorized access Using filter sets is part of reaching that goal Each filter set you design will be based on one of the following approaches m That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted m That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited It is strongly recommended that you take the latter and safer approach to all of your filter set designs Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets This section covers IP filters and filter sets System Configuration Filter Sets Main Menu gt To work with filters and filter sets begin by accessing the filter set screens Note Make sure you understand how filters work before attempting to use them Read the section About Filters and Filter Sets beginning on page 10 18 Filter Sets Add Filter Set Display Change Filter Set Delete Filter Set The procedure for creating and maintaining filter sets is as follows 1 Add anew filter set 2 Create the filters for the new filter set Security 10 27 3 View change or delete individual filters and filter sets The sections below explain how to execute these steps Adding a filter set You can create up to eight different cus
202. ls which occurs when the total number of CIRs for all PVCs exceeds the line rate setup 5 Select ADD DLCI NOW to save the current static Frame Relay DLCI profile that you have just entered and press Return to go back to the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen Alternately you can cancel the Frame Relay DLCI profile you have just created by selecting CANCEL to exit the Add DLCI screen Deleting a Frame Relay DLCI configuration To delete a Frame Relay DLCI configuration select Delete DLCI in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen and press Return to display the Frame Relay DLCI configuration table Frame Relay DLCI Configuration DLCI Name DLCI Number Are you sure you want to delete this DLCI CONTINUE Highlight the Frame Relay DLCI configuration you wish to delete Press Return A Frame Relay DLC Configuration table appears with a prompt asking you if you want to delete the connection profile you have just highlighted Select CONTINUE if you wish to delete this DLCI or CANCEL if you do not You are now finished configuring the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen 2 16 Firmware User Guide Multiple ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports up to eight permanent virtual circuits Multiple ATM PVC overview On cell based DSL WAN interfaces the ATM connection between the device and the central office equipment DSLAM is divided logically into one or more virtual circuits VCs A vi
203. lter Less Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be less than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must equal the port number specified in the filter Greater Than For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than the port number specified in the filter Greater Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Other filter attributes There are three other attributes to each filter m The filter s order i e priority in the filter set m Whether the filter is currently active m Whether the filter is set to forward packets or to block discard packets Putting the parts together Security 10 23 When you display a filter set its filters are displayed as rows in a table 211 211 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yes Yes The table s columns correspond to each filter s attributes The filter s priority in the set Filter number 1 with the highest priority is first in the table Source IP Addr The packet source IP address to match Dest IP Addr The packet destination IP address to match Proto The protocol to match This can be entered as a number see the table below or as TCP or UDP if those protocols are used N A O Ignores protocol type ICMP 1 Intern
204. lter Set Advanced IP Profile Options COMMIT m The Remote Tunnel Endpoint field accepts either an IP address in the familiar dotted quad notation a b c d or a hostname to be resolved using the Domain Name System DNS Multiple Network IPsec Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers an enhancement to IPsec VPN tunnels allowing multiple network support This feature enhances your Netopia Router s Virtual Private Networking functionality This feature allows you to define many local and remote network ranges for a given IPsec VPN profile Each of these ranges has its own IPsec tunnel However each tunnel has a common tunneling endpoint and encryption policy This is useful for example for branch office management of multiple IP subnets over an encrypted VPN tunnel The following diagram illustrates this feature subnet 10 0 0 0 8 subnet 192 168 1 1 24 ph2 SA1 a Netopia AOIN E EEEE EE EE EE j remote Itep 163 176 91 1 ISAKMP SA phase 1 itep 163 176 91 2 router lo addr 11 1 2 3 i addr 12 1 2 3 lo addr 11 0 0 2 hi addr 11 0 0 5 local nets remote nets Advantages of Multiple Network IPsec are m scalability m flexibility by adding any combination of remote local network ranges Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 15 m support for sub netting host and network range addressing modes m works with manual keying and Internet Key Exchange IKE m each IPsec
205. ltiple public addresses are accessible via your router If you want to use static mappings to map internal servers to public addresses your ISP or corporate site s router must also be configured for static routes to these public addresses on the Netopia Router m Enter the Public IP Address to which you are exporting the service Note For PAT map lists and server lists if you use the Public Address 0 0 0 0 the list will acquire its public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection Profile If that is a static IP address then the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address If it is a negotiated IP address such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address each time it is negotiated m Select ADD NAT SERVER and press Return The server will be added to your server list and you will be returned to the Add NAT Server List screen Note In order to use CUSeeMe through the Netopia Router you must export the ports 7648 and 7649 In MultiNat you may use a port range export Without the export CUSeeMe will fail to work This is true unless a static mapping is in place for the host using CUSeeMe In that case no server list entry is necessary 3 18 Firmware User Guide Modifying server lists Once a server list exists you can select it for modification or deletion m Select Show Change Server List from the Network Address Translation s
206. ly those operations that apply to the selected IP address in its current lease state IP Setup 6 27 Details is displayed if the entry is associated with both a host name and a client identifier Selecting Details displays a pop up menu that provides additional information associated with the IP address The pop up menu includes the IP address as well as the host name and client identifier supplied by the client to which the address is leased Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 101 IP Address is 192 168 1 108 Host Name is Barr s XPi 120 Client ID is EN 00 00 c5 45 89 ef 192 168 1 111 192 168 1 112 192 168 1 113 Lease Management Exclude is displayed if the entry is not already excluded Selecting Exclude excludes the IP address from the address serving pool so the address will not be served to a client If the IP address is currently leased to or reserved for a client you will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation 6 28 Firmware User Guide Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 168 1 100 168 1 101 You are about to make changes that will affect an address that is currently in use Are you sure you want to do this 168 2111 7168 1 112 7168 1 113 Lease Management m Include is displayed if the entry is either excluded or declined An IP address is marked decl
207. n If the partner should be reached via an alternate port i e the LAN instead of the WAN the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved m You can specify a Network Name When the tunnel partner is another Netopia router this name may be used to match against a Connection Profile When the partner is an Ascend router in Gateway mode then Network Name is used by the Ascend router to match a gateway profile When the partner is an Ascend router in Router mode leave this field blank m You must specify a Password used for authenticating the tunnel Note The Password entry will be the same for both ends of the tunnel m For Netopia to Netopia connections only you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the ATMP connection from the pop up menu either DES or None None is the default Note Ascend does not support DES encryption for ATMP tunnels m You must specify a Key String of up to and including 20 characters when DES is selected When encryption is None this field is invisible m You can specify that this router will Initiate Connections acting as a foreign agent Yes or only answer 4 10 Firmware User Guide them acting as a home agent No m Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand however you can disable this feature When disabled the tunnel must be manually established through the call management screens m You can specify the Idle Timeout an inactivity timer whose expiration will terminate
208. n again After temporary power outages a connection that still seems to be up may actually be disconnected Rebooting the router should reestablish the connection A 4 Firmware User Guide Technical Support Netopia Inc is committed to providing its customers with reliable products and documentation backed by excellent technical support Before contacting Netopia Look in this guide for a solution to your problem You may find a solution in this troubleshooting appendix or in other sections Check the index for a reference to the topic of concern If you cannot find a solution complete the environment profile below before contacting Netopia Technical Support Environment profile m Locate the Router s model number product serial number and firmware version The serial number is on the bottom of the router along with the model number The firmware version appears in the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 s Main Menu screen Model number Serial number Firmware version m What kind of local network s do you have with how many devices Ethernet TCP IP How to reach us We can help you with your problem more effectively if you have completed the environment profile in the previous section If you contact us by telephone please be ready to supply Netopia Technical Support with the information you used to configure the Router Also please be at the site of the problem and prepared to reproduce it and to try some troubleshooting steps
209. n also toggle Callback to No or Yes In most cases since this is a backup connection you can leave this set to the default No Using Scheduled Connections with Backup The backup link is a PPP dial up connection and only connects to the Internet service provider when traffic is initiated from the LAN If you want to use the backup link to provide redundancy for services such as a Web service that you provide to the outside world you must force the connection to stay up You do this by creating a scheduled connection entry that will be a permanent forced up connection for the backup port The backup port will be activated upon primary WAN link failure and remain active until primary WAN link recovery To configure a Scheduled Connection from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration and then Scheduled Connections Main A Scheduled Menu WAN Configuration Connections Line Backup 7 9 The Scheduled Connections screen appears Scheduled Connections Display Change Scheduled Connection Add Scheduled Connection Delete Scheduled Connection Return Enter to add a Scheduled Connection Navigate from here to add modify change delete Scheduled Connections m Select Add Scheduled Connection and press Return The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears Add Scheduled Connection Scheduled Connection Enable On How Often Weekly Schedule Type Forced Up Set Weekly Schedule Use
210. n screen Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Display Change DLCIs Add DLCI Delete DLCI Add delete and modify DLCIs from here Displaying a Frame Relay DLCI configuration table To display a view only table of the Frame Relay DLCls select Display Change DLCls in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen and press Return The Frame Relay DLCI Configuration table is a handy way to quickly view the DLC names and DLCI numbers that you attribute to your Frame Relay profiles Frame Relay DLCI Configuration DLCI Name DLCI Number Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit WAN and System Configuration 2 13 Changing a Frame Relay DLCI configuration To modify a Frame Relay DLCI configuration select Display Change DLCls in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen Select a DLCI Name from the table and press Return to go to the Change DLCI screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the parameters in the Add DLCI screen To find out how to set them see Adding a Frame Relay DLCI configuration on page 2 14 Change DLCI DLCI Name DLCI 33 DLCI Enabled Yes DLCI Number 16 991 32 Remote IP Address 2 14 Firmware User Guide Adding a Frame Relay DLCI configuration To add a new Frame Relay DLCI select Add DLCI in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen and press Return The Add DLCI screen appears 4 Add DLCI DLCI Name DLCI 16 DLCI Enabled Yes
211. n the same subnet as the Remote IP Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters the Tunnel Via Gateway option becomes visible You can enter the address by which the gateway partner is reached If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address the router will use the default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden If the partner should be reached via an alternate port i e the LAN instead of the WAN the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved m From the pop up menu select an Authentication protocol for the PPP connection Options are PAP CHAP or MS CHAP The default is PAP The authentication protocol must be the same on both ends of the tunnel m You can specify a Data Compression algorithm either None or Standard LZS for the PPTP connection Note When the Authentication protocol is MS CHAP compression is set to None and the Data Compression option is hidden m When the authentication protocol is MS CHAP you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the PPTP connection Available options are MPPE and None the default For other authentication protocols this option is hidden When MPPE is negotiated the WAN Event History reports that it is negotiated as a CCP compression type This is because the MPPE protocol uses a compression engine even though it is not itself a compression protocol 4 6 Firmware User Guide Note The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports 128 bit
212. n you attempt to connect Connection profiles define the networking protocols necessary for the router to make a remote connection A connection profile is like an address book entry describing how the router is to get to a remote site or how to recognize and authenticate a connection To create a new connection profile you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select Add Connection Profile Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration i Profile The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 IP Profile Parameters COMMIT CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit On a Netopia Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 but you can only use one at a time unless you are using VPNs 1 Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile It can be any name you wish For example the name of your ISP 2 Toggle Profile Enabled to Yes or No The default is Yes You can toggle it to No if you want to disable it later 3 Select Encapsulation Type and press Return The pop up menu offers the possible data link encapsulation methods for connection profiles used for a variety of purposes PPP RFC
213. nd UDP traffic to ports greater than 1023 Ports lower than 1024 are the service origination ports for various Internet services such as FTP Telnet and the World Wide Web WWW A more complicated filter set would be required to provide WAN access to a LAN based server See the next section Possible modifications for ways to allow remote hosts to use services provided by servers on the LAN Possible modifications You can modify the sample filter set Basic Firewall to allow incoming traffic using the examples below These modifications are not intended to be combined Each modification is to be the only one used with Basic Firewall The results of combining filter set modifications can be difficult to predict It is recommended that you take special care if you are making more than one modification to the sample filter set Trusted host To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote host with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 m Enabled Yes m Forward Yes m Source IP Address a b c d m Source IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 m Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 m Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 m Protocol Type O Trusted subnet To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote subnet with subnet address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 0 and subnet mask e f g h corresponding to a num
214. nd press Return Deleting IP trap receivers 1 To delete an IP trap receiver select Delete IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 Inthe dialog box select Continue and press Return 9 14 Firmware User Guide Security 10 1 Chapter 10 Security The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 provides a number of security features to help protect its configuration screens and your local network from unauthorized access Although these features are optional it is strongly recommended that you use them This section covers the following topics Suggested Security Measures on page 10 1 Console Tiered Access Two Password Levels on page 10 2 User Accounts on page 10 15 Telnet Access on page 10 17 About Filters and Filter Sets on page 10 18 Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets on page 10 26 Policy based Routing using Filtersets on page 10 34 Firewall Tutorial on page 10 37 Configuration Management on page 10 44 Call Filtering on page 10 48 Suggested Security Measures In addition to setting up user accounts Telnet access and filters all of which are covered later in this chapter there are other actions you can take to make the Router and your network more secure Change the SNMP community strings or passwords The default community strings are universal and could easily be known to a potential i
215. ne rat m f your ISP uses dynamic IP addressing DHCP select the Server assigned IP address radio button m If your ISP uses static IP addressing select the Specify an IP address radio button and enter your assigned IP address in the fields provided Also enter the IP address in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields Click the OK button in this window and the next two windows Installing the VPN Client Before Installing the VPN Client you must have TCP IP installed and have an established Internet connection Windows 95 VPN installation 1 From your Internet browser navigate to the following URL http www microsoft com NTServer nts downloads recommended dunl3win95 releasenotes aso Download the Microsoft Windows 95 VPN patch dun 1 3 to the Windows 95 computer you intend to use as a VPN client with PPTP Follow the installation instructions From the Windows 95 Start menu select Settings then Control Panel and click once The Control Panel screen appears Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs screen appears Click the Windows Setup tab The Windows Setup screen will be displayed within the top center box Highlight Communications and double click 4 18 Firmware User Guide This displays a list of possible selections for the communications option Active components will have a check in the checkboxes to their left Check Dial Up Networking at the top of the list and Virtual Private Networ
216. ne rate CBR One parameter is required for CBR VCs Enter the Peak Cell Rate that applies to the VC This value should be between 1 and the line rate You set this value according to specifications defined by your service provider Add Circuit Circuit Name Circuit 2 Circuit Enabled Yes Circuit VPI 0 255 Circuit VCI 32 65535 QoS Peak Cell Rate 0 line rate Use Connection Profile Default Profile Use Default Profile for Circuit ADD Circuit NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes m The Peak Cell Rate field is editable Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports two ATM classes of ser vice for data connections Unspecified Bit Rate UBR and Constant Bit Rate CBR You can configure these classes of service on a per VC basis The default ATM class of service is UBR m Then select a Connection Profile for the Circuit To use the Default Profile select Use Default Profile for Circuit and press Return For other options select a profile from the Use Connection Profile pop up menu WAN and System Configuration 2 19 Note With multiple VCs you must explicitly statically bind the second and all subsequent VCs to a profile The first VC will automatically statically bind according to pre defined dynamic binding rules when you add the second VC It will revert back to dynamic binding if the number of VCs is reduced to one for example by deleting previously defined
217. net a b c 248 The IP routing table might look similar to the following Understanding IP Addressing B 13 IP Routing Table SCROLL UP a b c 1 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 Loopback 255 255 255 192 a b c 128 WAN a b c 248 255 255 255 248 a b c 248 WAN UPDATE Let s see how a packet from the Internet gets routed to the host with IP address a b c 249 which is served by Router C The packet first arrives at Router A which delivers it to its local network a b c 0 The packet is then received by the Router which examines its destination IP address The Router compares the packet s destination IP address with the routes in its IP routing table It begins with the route at the bottom of the list and works up until there s a match or the route to the default gateway is reached When a b c 249 is masked by the first route s subnet mask it yields a b c 248 which matches the network address in the route The Router uses the connection profile associated with the route to connect to Router C and then forwards the packet Router C delivers the packet to the host on its local network B 14 Firmware User Guide The following diagram illustrates the IP address space taken up by the two remote IP subnets You can see from the diagram why the term nested is appropriate for describing these subnets 1 Address range available to a b c 0 less the two nested subnets 129 valid addresses used by a b c 128 T L 190 valid a
218. network configuration CONTINUE m Specifying IKE key management alters the Advanced IP Profile Options screen as follows Advanced IP Profile Options Local Tunnel Endpoint Address Next Hop Gateway Idle Timeout seconds m You can specify a Local Tunnel Endpoint Address If not 0 0 0 0 this value must be one of the assigned interface addresses either WAN or LAN This is used as the source address of all IPsec traffic m You can specify a Next Hop Gateway If you specify the Remote Tunnel Endpoint Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote Members Network you specified in the IP Profile Parameters the Next Hop Gateway option allows you to enter the address by which the gateway partner is reached If you do not specify the Remote Tunnel Endpoint Address the router will use the default gateway to reach the partner If the partner should be reached via an alternate port for example the LAN instead of the WAN the Next Hop Gateway field allows this path to be resolved m You can specify an Idle Timeout seconds value The idle timeout tells the router that if no traffic passes through the tunnel for the specified number of seconds no automatic SA re key should be performed When new traffic does pass through the tunnel the idle timeout interval resets again when the current SAs expire If you set the value to zero the router will re key the SA whenever the SA Lifetime interval specifies regardless of whe
219. network works under the same local remote tunnel endpoints m Select Add Network and press Return The Add Network Configuration screen appears Remote Member Format Remote Member Address Remote Member Mask Local Member Format Local Member Address Local Member Mask m The Remote Member Format and Local Member Format pop up menus allow you to choose a format for your network end points Subnet Range or a single Host Address m f you choose Subnet you must enter the Remote Member Address and the subnet mask that is the Remote Member Mask Enter the Local Member Address and the Local Member Mask in their respective fields m If you choose Range the next two fields become Remote Member 1st Address and Remote Member Last Address You supply these values Complete the Local Member 1st Address and Local Member Last Address fields m f you choose Host Address you need only supply the Remote Member Address and the Local Mem ber Address the other fields are hidden m Select COMMIT and press Return to add the configuration This returns you to the IP Profile Parameters screen Select COMMIT and press Return in the IP Profile Parameters screen This returns you to the Change Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT and press Return in the Change Connection Profile screen Note e Any two IPsec tunnels differ only by the local remote networks they are intended to reach they have the same encryption policy which is derived fr
220. nfiguration elements in their descendant menus m Configuration screen elements to which configuration access is forbidden are usually hidden m The Quick Menus screen reflects the security access level of the user Menus to which configuration access is forbidden are hidden Main Menu The following is an example comparison of the Main Menu as seen by the Superuser and by a Limited user Superuser Limited user Netopia Router Netopia Router Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick Menus Quick View Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration ou always start from this main screen ou always start from this main screen Security 10 9 Based on access level the Main Menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram User Access Level Nerobia ere Superuser Easy Setup WAN Conn Profiles PVC WAN Configuration All System Configuration All Utilities amp Diagnostics Global Voice Statistics amp Logs All Quick Menus All Quick View return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration ou always start from this main screen WAN Configuration screens If a limited user is allo
221. nfigured ranges are suitable for this mapping you can select lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt and create a new range If you choose lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt the Add NAT Public Range screen displays and you can create a new public range to be used by this map See Add NAT Public Range on page 3 9 m The Add NAT Map screen now displays the range you have assigned Add NAT Map my map First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range my_first_range Public Range Type is pat Public Range Start Address is 206 1 1 6 m Select ADD NAT MAP and press Return Your mapping is added to your map list Multiple Network Address Translation 3 13 Modifying map lists You can make changes to an existing map list after you have created it Since there may be more than one map list you must select which one you are modifying From the Network Address Translation screen select Show Change Map List and press Return m Select the map list you want to modify from the pop up menu Network Address Translation NAT Map List Name Add Out Easy PAT List Show Ch my _map Delete Add Map Show Ch Delete Add Ser Show Ch Delete NAT Ass Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit The Show Change NAT Map List screen appears Show Change NAT Map List Map List Name my _map Add Map Show Change Maps Delete Map 3 14 Firmware User Guide m
222. ng data ports m Ethernet m DSL Network Interface The bottom left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted m P IP packets on the Ethernet The right side of the table lists the total number of occurrences of each of six types of communication statistics Rx Bytes The number of bytes received Tx Bytes The number of bytes transmitted Rx Packets The number of packets received Tx Pkts The number of packets transmitted Rx Err The number of bad Ethernet packets received Tx Err The number of errors occurring when Ethernet packets are transmitted simultaneously by nodes on the LAN Monitoring Tools 9 9 System Information The System Information screen gives a summary view of the general system level values in the Router From the Statistics amp Logs menu select System Information The System Information screen appears System Information Serial Number f 70 00 16740352 Firmware Version 5 4 ModelNumber 4541200 Processor Speed Mhz 50 Flash Rom Capacity MBytes 2 DRAM Capacity MBytes 16 Hardware Acceleration Not Installed Ethernet Single 10 100 Port WAN Interface ADSL The information display varies by model firmware version feature set and so on You can tell at a glance your particular system configuration 9 10 Firmware User Guide Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP V2c The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 includes a Simple Network Management Pro
223. ng sessions will be rejected by the router For example Suppose you are a teleworker using an IPSec tunnel from the router and from the passthrough host Both tunnels go to the same remote endpoint such as the VPN access concentrator at your employer s office In this case the first one to start the IPSec traffic will be allowed the second one since from the WAN it s indistinguishable will fail Multiple Network Address Translation 3 31 MultiNAT Configuration Example To help you understand a typical MultiNAT configuration this section describes an example of the type of configuration you may want to implement on your site The values shown are for example purposes only Make your own appropriate substitutions A typical DSL service from an ISP might include five user addresses Without PAT you might be able to attach only five IP hosts Using simple 1 to many PAT you can connect more than five devices but use only one of your addresses Using multiNAT you can make full use of the address range The example assumes the following range of addresses offered by a typical ISP Local WAN IP address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN subnet mask 255 255 255 248 Remote IP address 206 1 1 254 Default gateway 206 1 1 254 Public IP addresses assigned by the ISP are 206 1 1 1 through 206 1 1 6 255 255 255 248 subnet mask Your internal devices have IP addresses of 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 subnet mask
224. no traffic on the session m TCP no activity time out The time in seconds after which an TCP session will be terminated if there is no traffic on the session m Exposed Addresses The hosts specified in Exposed addresses will be allowed to receive inbound traffic even if there is no corresponding outbound traffic This is active only if NAT is disabled on an WAN interface 2 38 Firmware User Guide Stateful Inspection Options Enable and configure stateful inspection on a WAN interface IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled IP Addressing NAT Map List NAT Server List NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Return Enter to select lt among between gt Configure IP requirements for a remote n Yes Numbered Easy PAT List Easy Servers No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 etwork connection here When you create or modify a Connection Profile the IP Profile Parameters screen allows you to enable Stateful Inspection on that profile by toggling Stateful Inspection Enabled to Yes By default this is turned off No If you enable Stateful Inspection the Stateful Inspection Options field appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled IP Addressing Stateful Inspection Enabled _ Stateful Inspection Options Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Filter Set Rem
225. nspectors lined up to examine a package If the package matches the first inspector s criteria the package is either rejected or passed on to its destination depending on the first inspector s particular orders In this case the package is never seen by the remaining inspectors packet first filter discard delete forward to network 10 20 Firmware User Guide If the package does not match the first inspector s criteria it goes to the second inspector and so on You can see that the order of the inspectors in the line is very important For example let s say the first inspector s orders are to send along all packages that come from Rome and the second inspector s orders are to reject all packages that come from France If a package arrives from Rome the first inspector sends it along without allowing the second inspector to see it A package from Paris is ignored by the first inspector rejected by the second inspector and never seen by the others A package from London is ignored by the first two inspectors so it s seen by the third inspector In the same way filter sets apply their filters in a particular order The first filter applied can forward or discard a packet before that packet ever reaches any of the other filters If the first filter can neither forward nor discard the packet because it cannot match any criteria the second filter has a chance to forward or reject it and so on Because of
226. nt software for Dial Up Networking in order to connect to an ISP who provides a PPTP account Microsoft Windows Dial Up Networking DUN is the means by which you can initiate a VPN tunnel between your individual remote client workstation and a private network such as your corporate LAN via the Internet DUN is a software adapter that allows you to establish a tunnel DUN is a free add on available for Windows 95 and comes standard with Windows 98 and Windows NT The VPN tunnel behaves as a private network connection unrelated to other traffic on the network Once you have installed Dial Up Networking you will be able to connect to your remote site as if you had a direct private connection regardless of the intervening network s through which your data passes You may need to install the Dial Up Networking feature of Windows 95 98 or 2000 to take advantage of the virtual private networking feature of your Netopia router Note For the latest information and tech notes on Dial Up Networking and VPNs be sure to visit the Netopia website at http www netopia com and for the latest software and release notes the Microsoft website at http www microsoft com Installing Dial Up Networking Check to see if Dial Up Networking is already installed on your PC Open your My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop If there is a folder named Dial Up Networking you don t have to install it If there is no such folder you must
227. nter a name for the file you will upload The file will appear with the name you choose on the TFTP server You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example Mypc Netopia myfile 3 Select SEND CONFIG TO SERVER and press Return Netopia will begin to transfer the file The TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Writing Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with XMODEM You can transfer configuration and firmware files with XMODEM through the Router s console port if available on your model Be sure your terminal emulation program supports XMODEM file transfers To go to the X Modem File Transfer screen select it in the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu Note The X Modem File Transfer screen is only available if you are connected via the Console port Note It is good practice when updating programmable devices to disable any other programs or network activity on the device or the attached computer This includes WAN traffic such as a DSL connection or screen savers or other automatic programs running on the attached computer Such activity can slow down or interrupt the file transfer requiring you to rerun the upgrade 11 10 Firmware User Guide X Modem File Transfer Send Firmware to Netopia Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration Send Config to Netopia Send Configuration Cu
228. ntruder Set the answer profile so it must match incoming calls to a connection profile Leave the Enable Dial in Console Access option set to No Configure the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 through the serial console port if available to ensure that your communications cannot be intercepted 10 2 Firmware User Guide Console Tiered Access Two Password Levels Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers tiered access control for greater security and protection against accidental or malicious misconfiguration Service providers and network administrators can now limit the access of other users to the various configuration screens to prevent misconfigurations The access privileges of various users that may be assigned are governed by a Superuser administrative account The Superuser can assign different privileges to Limited users who will be accessing the router functions in some way Configuration access names and passwords are specified in the Security Options screen From the Main Menu select System Configuration then Security Main i System Security Menu Configuration Security Options The Security Options screen appears Security Options UPnP Enabled on reboot Enable Telnet Console Access Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens Superuser Configuration Advanced Security Options Configuration Management Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels UPnP Support
229. nvolves their reference to source and destination From the perspective of an input filter your local network is the destination of the packets it checks and the remote network is their source From the perspective of an output filter your local network is the source of the packets and the remote network is their destination Input filter The remote network The local network Output filter The local network The remote network To add a filter select Display Change Filter Set in the Filter Set screen From the pop up menu select the filter set to which you will add a filter The Display Change Filter Set screen appears Security 10 29 Display Change Filter Set Filter Set Name Filter Set 3 Add Input Filter to Filter Set Display Change Input Filter Delete Input Filter Move Input Filter Add Output Filter to Filter Set Display Change Output Filter Delete Output Filter Move Output Filter Note There are two groups of items in this screen one for input filters and one for output filters In this section you ll learn how to add an input filter to a filter set Adding an output filter works exactly the same way providing you keep the different source and destination perspectives in mind 1 To add a filter select Add Input Filter to Filter Set and press Return The Add Input Filter screen appears Add Input Filter Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest
230. o enter a file path along with the file name for example bigroot config myfile Select GET CONFIG FROM SERVER and press Return You will see the following dialog box Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect Utilities and Diagnostics 11 9 m f you choose to download the configuration file the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Uploading configuration files Using TFTP you can send a file containing a snapshot of the router s current configuration to a TFTP server The file can then be downloaded by a different Router unit to configure its parameters see Downloading configuration files on page 11 8 This is useful for configuring a number of routers with identical parameters or just for creating configuration backup files Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Router unit by Netopia or your network administrator To upload a configuration file follow these steps 1 Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located 2 Select Config File Name and e
231. o specify the type of ESP authentication None HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA1 96 If you select Advanced IPsec Options the Advanced IPsec Options screen appears 5 12 Firmware User Guide Advanced IPsec Options SA Lifetime seconds 28800 SA Lifetime Kbytes 0 Perfect Forward Secrecy Yes Dead Peer Detection No This screen allows you to specify the lifetime associated with each IPsec Security Association SA and control when the SA will expire and become invalid SA Lifetime seconds specifies the duration in seconds for which the SA will remain valid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is 28 800 seconds 1 hour The value zero specifies the absence of an elapsed time lifetime SA Lifetime Kilobytes specifies the maximum number of kilobytes of data that may be secured encrypted decrypted or authenticated using the SA before it expires and becomes invalid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is O Kilobytes The value zero specifies the absence of a secured data lifetime Note It is invalid to set both lifetime values to zero This condition is not enforced by the console in order to avoid order dependencies when configuring the items but rather is enforced at runtime and will cause the IPsec profile to assume the defaults Perfect Forward Secrecy toggles whether or not P
232. og client daemon program on your PC and configure it to report the WAN events you specified in the Logging Configuration screen The following screen shows a sample syslog dump of WAN events tsnext netopia com Link 1 down PPP PAP failure tsnext netopia com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 tsnext netopia com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down Manual disconnect tsnext netopia com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 tsnext netopia com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down No answer tsnext netopia com Device restarted tsnext netopia com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN not supplied tsnext netopia com Requested Connect to our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com ASYNC Modem carrier detected more Modem reports 26400 V34 tsnext netopia com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 activated at 115 Kbps tsnext netopia com Connect Confirmed to our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com PPP Channel 1 up Answer Profile name Default Profile tsnext netopia com PPP NCP up session 1 Channel 1 Final fallback negotiated auth Local PAP Remote NONE tsnext netopia com PPP PAP we accepted remote Channel 1 Remote name guest tsnext netopia com PPP MP negotiated session 1 Remote EDO 06 03 0 000C5700624 0 tsnext net
233. om the base profile e The feature is limited to 8 networks per tunnel 5 16 Firmware User Guide If you return to the IP Profile Parameters screen two new fields are displayed IP Profile Parameters Remote Tunnel Endpoint 0 0 0 0 Display Change Network Delete Network Address Translation Enabled No Filter Set lt lt None gt gt Remove Filter Set Advanced IP Profile Options COMMIT CANCEL Enter the IP Address or hostname of the remote tunnel endpoint m Display Change Network allows you to make changes to existing network configurations you have made If you select Display Change Network a list of your configured networks displays Display Change Network Configuration Local Members Net Type Start Address Size SCROLL UP SUBNET 192 168 2 1 SUBNET 192 168 1 0 SUBNET 10 0 1 1 SUBNET 10 0 0 1 HOST 163 176 91 101 HOST 163 176 91 100 RANGE 163 176 30 222 21 RANGE 163 176 91 100 100 Scroll down and up with the arrow keys to select the one you want to change and press Return You will be returned to the Network Configuration screen where you can make any required changes m f you select Delete Network in the IP Profile Parameters screen the same scrolling list will display When you select one of the networks and press Return a warning screen will ask you to confirm your choice Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 17 Are you sure you want to delete this
234. omplete security solution but rather a component of overall security Using a VPN will add security to transactions carried over a public network but a VPN alone will not prevent a public network from infiltrating a private network Therefore you should combine use of a firewall with VPNs where the firewall will secure the private network from infiltration from a public network and the VPN will secure the transactions that must cross the public network A strict firewall may not be provisioned to allow VPN traffic to pass back and forth as needed In order to ensure that a firewall will allow a VPN certain attributes must be added to the firewall s provisioning The provisions necessary vary slightly between ATMP and PPTP but both protocols operate on the same basic premise there are control and negotiation operations and there is the tunnelled traffic that carries the payload of data between the VPN endpoints The difference is that ATMP uses UDP to handle control and negotiation while PPTP uses TCP Then both ATMP and PPTP use GRE to carry the payload For PPTP negotiation to work TCP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 1723 must be allowed Likewise for ATMP negotiation to work UDP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 5150 must be allowed Source ports are dynamic so if possible make this flexible too Additionally PPTP and ATMP both require a firewall to allow GRE bi directionally The following sections illustra
235. on IP addresses TCP or UDP ports or the TCP ACK bit Port A number that defines a particular type of service Basic IP packet components All IP packets contain the same basic header information as follows Source IP Address 163 176 132 18 Destination IP Address 163 176 4 27 Source Port 2541 Destination Port 80 Protocol TCP ACK Bit Yes DATA User Data This header information is what the packet filter uses to make filtering decisions It is important to note that a packet filter does not look into the IP data stream the User Data from above to make filtering decisions Basic protocol types TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP provides reliable packet delivery and has a retransmission mechanism so packets are not lost RFC 793 is the specification for TCP UDP User Datagram Protocol Unlike TCP UDP does not guarantee reliable sequenced packet delivery If data does not reach its destination UDP does not retransmit the data RFC 768 is the specification for UDP There are many more ports defined in the Assigned Addresses RFC The table that follows shows some of these port assignments 10 38 Firmware User Guide Example TCP UDP Ports TCP Port Service UDP Port Service 20 21 FTP 161 SNMP 23 Telnet 69 TFTP 25 SMTP 387 AURP 80 WWW 144 News Firewall design rules There are two basic rules to firewall design m What is not explicitly allowed is denied and
236. onnection Profile and press Return The server list you selected will now be bound to this Connection Profile Note There is no interdependency between NAT and IP Addressing Also the Local WAN IP Address and Mask fields visibility are dependent only on the IP Addressing type Multiple Network Address Translation 3 23 IP Parameters WAN Default Profile The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 using RFC 1483 supports a WAN default profile that permits several parameters to be configured without an explicitly configured Connection Profile The procedure is similar to the procedure to bind map lists and server lists to a Connection Profile From the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen then the Default Profile screen Select IP Parameters and press Return Main Menu WAN WAN Default IP Parameters l Configuration a Profile a The IP Parameters Default Profile screen appears IP Parameters Default Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Filter Set Firewall Remove Filter Set Receive RIP Return Enter to select lt among between gt m Toggle Address Translation Enabled to Yes 3 24 Firmware User Guide m Select NAT Map List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined map lists IP Parameters Default Profile NAT Map List Name Easy PAT List my map Addres
237. onvert the IP address and mask in question to binary This will allow you to perform the logical AND to determine whether a packet matches a filter rule Logical AND function When a packet is compared in most cases a logical AND function is performed First the IP addresses and subnet masks are converted to binary and then combined with AND The rules for the logical use of AND are as follows O AND O 0 O AND 1 0 1 ANDO 0 1AND1 1 For example Filter rule Deny IP 163 176 1 15 BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 Mask 255 255 255 255 BINARY 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 Incoming Packet IP 163 176 1 15 BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 If you put the incoming packet and subnet mask together with AND the result is 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 which matches the IP address in the filter rule and the packet is denied Implied rules With a given set of filter rules there is an Implied rule that may or may not be shown to the user The implied rule tells the filter set what to do with a packet that does not match any of the filter rules An example of implied rules is as follows Implied Meaning Y Y Y N If all filter rules are YES the implied rule is NO N N N Y If all filter rules are NO the implied rule is YES Y N Y N If a mix of YES and NO filters the implied rule is NO 10 40 Firmware User Guide Established connections The TCP header contains one bit
238. opia com PPP CCP negotiated session 1 type Ascend LZS Local mode 1 Remote mode 1 tsnext netopia com PPP BACP negotiated session 1 Local MN FFFFFF FF Remote MN 00000001 tsnext netopia com PPP IPCP negotiated session 1 rem 192 168 10 100 local 192 168 1 1 tsnext netopia com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 deactivated tsnext netopia com Received Clear Ind from DN 5108645534 Cause 0 tsnext netopia com Issued Clear Response to DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down Remote clearing tsnext netopia com PPP IPCP down session 1 tsnext netopia com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN not supplied 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 48 Firmware User Guide Multiple Network Address Translation 3 1 Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers advanced Multiple Network Address Translation functionality You should read this chapter completely before attempting to configure any of the advanced NAT features This chapter covers the following topics m Overview on page 3 1 m MultiNAT Configuration on page 3 6 m Easy Setup Profile configuration on page 3 6 m Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration on page 3 7 m Adding Server Lists on page 3 15 m Binding Map Lists and Server Lists on page 3 21 m NAT Associations on page 3 25 m P Passthrough on page 3 27 m MultiNAT Configuration Example on page 3 31 Overview NAT Network
239. or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling Line Backup 7 13 SNMP Support The router supports objects for determining the state of backup as well as providing traps for the backup and recovery events No objects support configuration of backup or recovery Backup Default Gateway Introduced in version 5 1 2 the firmware offers backup functionality to an alternate gateway typically connected to a LAN port A typical application would be to have a LAN connection from your 4000 Series router to another router that has for example an ISDN or analog modem connection to the Internet and designating the second router as the backup gateway Should the primary WAN connection fail traffic would be automatically redirected through your alternate gateway device to maintain Internet connectivity Two menus control the backup gateway feature m the Backup Configuration screen in the WAN Configuration menu Here you enable the backup feature and set some parameters m the IP Setup screen in the System Configuration menu Here you set the IP address of the alternate gateway device Backup Configuration screen To enable the backup feature from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration Advanced Connection Options and then Backup Configuration Main WAN Advanced Backup Menu Configuration Connection Options Configuration 7 14 Firmware User Guide The Backup Configuration screen appears Backup Configuration Backup Parameters
240. ormational purposes to ascertain that the provisioning on the voice gateway is in sync with the IAD LES stands for Loop Emulation Service an increasingly popular standard among ATM voice gateway manufacturers If the voice gateway is LES compliant see LES Profile Number below a pop up menu allows you to choose between G711 PCM 64K and G726 ADPCM 32K Your service provider must supply you with the correct provisioning information The reason is that in those gateway types the voice gateway expects this type of provisioning to be done prior to making any voice calls If the voice gateway is not LES compliant the pop up menus are not available and these fields are for information only Once you have made your settings for each voice port press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu m Select Voice Coding and press Return From the pop up menu choose the voice coding method you will be using The default is mu law which is the standard 8 bit 8 kHz mono format intended primarily for the requirements of voice in North America You can also choose a law a more common audio format outside North America m f your service provider is using an LES compliant voice gateway the LES Profile Number option becomes visible From the pop up menu choose either Profile 9 or Profile 10 The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports LES profile 9 and LES profile 10 LES profile 9 includes only PCM calls LES profile 10 includes PCM and ADPCM
241. ou can associate an IPsec profile with the Primary the Backup or choose to apply it to Any Port of the WAN interface by choosing the interface from the Interface Group pop up menu as shown below Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type IPsec Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary Backup From the Encapsulation Type pop up menu select IPsec Then select Encapsulation Options and press Return The IPsec Tunnel Options screen appears IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management IKE IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP ESP Encryption Transform ESP Authentication Transform Advanced IPsec Options COMMIT Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 11 The Key Management pop up menu at the top of the IPsec Tunnel Options screen allows you to choose between IKE key management the default for a new IPsec profile and Manual key management If you select Manual the IKE Phase 1 Profile option does not display and you must enter your IPSec Manual Keys under the IPsec Manual Keys screen See IPSec Manual Key Entry on page 19 The IKE Phase 1 Profile pop up menu allows you to associate an IKE Phase 1 Profile with the IPsec tunnel An IKE Phase 1 Profile specifies the set of parameters that will be used for the IKE Phase 1 exchange IKE Phase 1 Profiles may be shared by multiple IPsec tunnels The pop
242. ou may also define a specific public IP address to use for this service if you want to use an IP other than the WAN IP address of the Netopia Router Static mapping If you want to host your own Website or provide other Internet services to the public you need more than classic NAT The reason is noted under Port Address Translation above external users cannot initiate traffic to computers on your LAN because external users can never see the real addresses of the computers on your LAN If you want users outside your LAN to have access for example to a Web or FTP server that you host you need to make a public representation of the real IP addresses of those servers Static mappings are a way to make one or more private IP addresses fully accessible from the public network via corresponding public IP addresses Some applications may negotiate multiple TCP connections in the process of communication which often does not work with traditional PAT Static mapping offers the ability to use these applications through NAT Each private IP address is mapped on a one to one basis to a public IP address that can be accessed from the Internet or public network As with PAT mappings you may have multiple static mappings to map a range of private IP addresses to a range of public IP addresses if desired Multiple Network Address Translation 3 3 Dynamic mapping Dynamic mapping often referred to as many to few offers an extension to the advantages pro
243. ove Filter Set RIP Profile Options No Numbered Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Select Stateful Inspection Options and press Return The Stateful Inspection Parameters screen appears WAN and System Configuration 2 39 Stateful Inspection Parameters Max TCP Sequence Number Difference Enable default mapping to router Deny Fragmented Packets Exposed Address List Enter max allowed TCP sequence number difference 1 65535 0 to disable m Max TCP Sequence Number Difference Enter a value in this field This value represents the maximum sequence number difference allowed between subsequent TCP packets If this number is exceeded the packet is dropped The acceptable range is O 65535 A value of O zero disables this check Enable default mapping to router This is disabled by default Toggling this option to Yes will allow the router to respond to traffic received on this interface for example ICMP Echo requests Note If Stateful Inspection is enabled on a base connection profile for example for PPP RFC1483 bridged routed or PPPoE Enable default mapping to router must be yes to allow inbound VPN terminations for example for PPTP ATMP client access to the router m Deny Fragmented Packets Toggling this option to Yes causes the router to discard fragmented packets on this interface m You can apply these parameters to your Exposed Address lists by selecting your
244. pe other than None the T391 option specifies the number of seconds between the Status Enquiry messages The default setting is 10 m The N391 option specifies the frequency of full status polls in increments of the basic T391 polling cycle The default setting is 6 m The N392 option specifies the maximum number of link reliability protocol and sequence number error events that can occur within the N393 sliding window If an N392 threshold is exceeded the switch declares the Netopia Router inactive The default setting is 3 m The N393 option allows the user to specify the width of the sliding N392 monitored event window The default setting is 4 2 Select Tx Injection Management and press Return From the pop up menu highlight Standard if you want the frames on your line that exceed the configured service parameters to be dropped at the router Buffered if you want the frames on your line that exceed the link capacity to be delayed until the link is less busy or None if you want all of the frames on your line to be transmitted Press Return Note If you select None as the Tx Injection Management type the three Tx Injection Management options listed below will remain hidden Go to step 4 If you select Standard or Buffered as the Tx Injection Management type then the Default CIR Bc and Be values will appear in the corresponding fields below the Tx Injection Management field in order for you to define the parameters of the manag
245. pering To password protect the configuration screens select Easy Setup from the Main Menu and go to the Easy Setup Security Configuration screen By entering a name and password pair in this screen all access via serial Telnet SNMP and Web server will be password protected 10 18 Firmware User Guide To restrict Telnet access select Security in the Advanced Configuration menu The Security Options screen will appear There are two levels of Telnet restriction available m To restrict Telnet access to the SNMP screens select Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens and toggle it to No See SNMP traps on page 9 12 m To restrict Telnet access to all of the configuration screens select Enable Telnet Console Access and toggle it to No About Filters and Filter Sets Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network connected to the Internet Using packet filters to control network communications can greatly improve your network s security The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 s packet filters are designed to provide security for the Internet connections made to and from your network You can customize the router s filter sets for a variety of packet filtering applications Typically you use filters to selectively admit or refuse TCP IP connections from certain remote networks and specific hosts You will also use filters to screen particular types of connections This is commonly called firewalling your network
246. platform m ADB 9 connector end attaches to a PC m ADB 9 end of the Console cable attaches to the Console port m If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows 95 98 2000 or NT you can use the HyperTerminal application bundled with the operating system m If you connect a Macintosh computer you can use the ZTerm terminal emulation program on the supplied Netopia CD 1 6 Firmware User Guide Launch your terminal emulation software and configure the communications software for the values shown in the table below These are the default communication parameters that the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 uses Terminal type PC ANSI BBS Mac ANSI VT 100 or VT 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Speed 9600 57600 bits per second Flow Control None Note The router firmware contains an autobaud detection feature If you are at any screen on the serial console you can change your baud rate and press Return HyperTerminal for the PC requires a disconnect The new baud rate is displayed at the bottom of the screen Introduction 1 7 Navigating through the Console Screens Use your keyboard to navigate the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 s configuration screens enter and edit information and make choices The following table lists the keys to use to navigate through the console screens Move through selectable items in a screen or pop up menu Up Down Left and Right Arrow Set a change to a selected
247. port to be used for a modem m the Backup Configuration menu under WAN Configuration Advanced Connection Options Here you select Backup is Automatic and Recovery is Automatic m the Add Connection Profile menus under the WAN Configuration menus Here you choose Encapsulation Type PPP fill out the correct IP information select Backup as the interface group and fill out the Telco Options m the Backup IP Gateway menu item in the IP Setup screen under the System Configuration menu Here you enter the Backup Gateway IP address Detailed descriptions follow WAN Configuration To configure Line Backup from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration and then WAN Setup Line Backup Main Menu m WAN Configuration WAN Setup WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile WAN Default Profile ATMP PPTP Default Profile IKE Phase 1 Configuration Scheduled Connections Backup Configuration Frame Relay Configuration Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Establish WAN Connection Disconnect WAN Connection Return Enter to create a new Connection Profile From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information The Choose Interface to Configure screen appears Choose Interface to Configure G SHDSL ATM Setup Serial Port Setup Choose the inte
248. pted tunnel connection is answered WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile WAN Default Profile ATMP PPTP Default Profile Scheduled Connections Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection To set the parameters under which the router will answer attempted VPN connections select AIMP PPTP Default Profile and press Return The ATMP PPTP Default Profile screen appears 4 12 Firmware User Guide ATMP PPTP Default Profile Answer ATMP PPTP Connections No PPTP Configuration Options Receive Authentication PAP Data Compression m Toggle Answer ATMP PPTP Connections to Yes if you want the router to accept VPN connections or No the default if you do not m For PPTP tunnel connections only you must define what type of authentication these connections will use Select Receive Authentication and press Return A pop up menu offers the following options PAP the default CHAP or MS CHAP m If you chose PAP or CHAP authentication from the Data Compression pop up menu select either None the default or Standard LZS If you chose MS CHAP authentication the Data Compression option is not required and this menu item becomes hidden Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 13 VPN QuickView You can view the status of your VPN connections in the VPN QuickView screen From the Main Menu select QuickView and t
249. r s connection profiles and system configuration This section covers the following topics m WAN Configuration on page 2 1 m ADSL Line Configuration screen on page 2 2 m SDSL IDSL Configuration screen on page 2 3 m G SHDSL Line Configuration screen on page 2 6 m T1 Line Configuration screen on page 2 7 m Frame Relay Configuration on page 2 9 a Multiple ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits on page 2 16 m Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 24 m The Default Profile on page 2 28 m Scheduled Connections on page 2 29 m System Configuration Screens on page 2 35 WAN Configuration To configure your Wide Area Network WAN connection navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select WAN Wide Area Network Setup Main WAN WAN Menu Configuration Setup The Line Configuration screen appears The Line Configuration screen will be appropriate to the type of WAN interface supported by your particular router model 2 2 Firmware User Guide ADSL Line Configuration screen The ADSL Line Configuration screen is shown below ADSL Line Configuration Circuit Type Multimode Trellis Coding Enabled On Signaling Mode FDM Fast Retrain Enabled On Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 1 Select Circuit Type and from the pop up menu choose the type of circuit to which you will be connecting Multimode 71 413 G dmt G li
250. r Protocol TFTP TFTP Server Name Firmware File Name GET ROUTER FIRMWARE FROM SERVER Config File Name GET CONFIG FROM SERVER SEND CONFIG TO SERVER TFTP Transfer State Idle TFTP Current Transfer Bytes 0 The sections below describe how to update the Router s firmware and how to download and upload configuration files Updating firmware Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization s network administrator The Router ships with an embedded operating system referred to as firmware The firmware governs how the device communicates with your network and the WAN or remote site Firmware updates are periodically posted on the Netopia website To update the router s firmware follow these steps m Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located m Select Firmware File Name and enter the name of the file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example bigroot config myfile 11 8 Firmware User Guide m Select GET ROUTER FIRMWARE FROM SERVER and press Return You will see the following dialog box Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia The device will restart when t
251. raditionally have difficulty communicating through NAT Dynamic NAT is intended to provide functionality beyond many to one and one to one translation Netopia s NAT implementation makes it possible to have a static mapping of one public address to one private address thus allowing applications such as NetMeeting to work by assuring that any traffic sent back to the source IP address is forwarded through to the internal machine Static one to one mapping works well if you have enough IP addresses for all the workstations on your LAN If you do not Dynamic NAT allows machines to make full use of the publicly routable IP addresses provided by the ISP as necessary on demand When these public IP addresses are no longer being used by a particular workstation they are returned to a pool of available addresses for other workstations to use A common example is a DSL customer s application Most DSL ISPs only provide customers with a few IP addresses for use on their network For networks with more than four or five machines it is usually mandatory to use NAT A customer may have 15 workstations on the LAN all of which need Internet access The customer is only provided five IP addresses by their ISP The customer has eight hosts which only need to use email and have Web access but another seven hosts which use NetMeeting to communicate with clients once or twice a day NetMeeting will not work unless a static one to one mapping exists for the machine r
252. re configuration using the Network Address Translation item on the IP Setup screen An example MultiNAT configuration at the end of this chapter describes some applications for these features See the MultiNAT Configuration Example on page 3 31 In order to configure the router to make servers on your LAN visible to the Internet you use advanced features in the System Configuration screens described in IP setup IP setup To access the NAT configuration screens from the Main Menu navigate to IP Setup Main System IP Menu Configuration Setup 3 8 Firmware User Guide IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway 127 0 0 2 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name isp com Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP off Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen Select Network Address Translation NAT and press Return The Network Address Translation screen appears Network Address Translation Add Public Range Show Change Public Range Delete Public Range Add Map List Show Change Map List Delete Map List Add Server List Show Change Server List Delete Server List NAT Associations Return Enter to configure IP Address redirection
253. re that the primary WAN connection is well re established before the router switches back to it from the backup mode m You can toggle Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 to Yes or No the default This setting determines whether the router should try to Auto Recover when the backup is invoked because of a Layer 2 loss for example a no valid Connection Profile Layer 1 is still available and this is what recovery checks Use this setting with caution Setting it to Yes may induce alternating switching between Backup and Recovery Mode This field will determine the recovery behavior of a Manual backup and Ping failure backup These two failures are treated as Layer 2 failure Select Clear Backup Call only if idle The default Yes will prevent the backup call from being torn down if there is activity on the backup connection when the primary connection comes back up You can toggle this to No if you wish Requires idle time of seconds specifies how long the device should wait before permitting the call to be torn down after a period of inactivity Data Link Encapsulation is set to Async PPP This field is not editable Line Backup 7 7 Connection Profiles The line backup feature allows you to configure a complete Connection Profile for the backup port just as you do for your primary WAN connection In this way profiles are associated with a particular interface The profile should reflect the port it is associated with It should have switch
254. rface to configure for backup Serial Port Setup The Serial Port Configuration screen appears 7 4 Firmware User Guide Serial Port Mode Console Only Modem Auto m The default mode is Console Only This is the normal state for using a terminal emulation application to manage the router See Connecting a Console Cable to your Equipment on page 1 5 If you select Modem Auto from the pull down menu the router becomes capable of auto detecting the presence of a modem or a console connection attached to the serial console port m A console connection is detected at the connection speed defined on the Console Configuration menu see Console Configuration on page 2 43 Amodem will be detected at the data rate you specify in the following menu It will not auto detect the Console baud rate in Modem Auto mode Serial Port Configuration Serial Port Mode Modem Auto Data Rate kbps 57600 Serial Modem Init String AT amp F amp C1 amp D2E0S0 1 Serial Modem Directory Number Line Backup 7 5 Note e The modem cable should have a standard DB 9 female connector to connect to the console port This is the standard type of modem cable connector e Macintosh users who use a USB to serial adapter to connect to the console serial port can use a modem in Modem Auto mode However your terminal emulator software will not function in this mode via the USB adapter due to the pin assignments in the adapter For console manag
255. rform the logical AND 10000000 Logical AND result This incoming IP packet 10000000 has a source IP address that does not match the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 This rule will forward this packet because the packet does not match Example 3 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND Security 10 43 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND 10110000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 1011000 this rule does not match and this packet will be forwarded Example 4 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 104 200 1 1 104 01101000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND 01100000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule does match and
256. ro specifies the default m Phase 1 SA Lifetime Kbytes specifies the maximum number of kilobytes of data that may be secured encrypted decrypted or authenticated using the SA before it expires and becomes invalid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is O Kilobytes The value zero specifies the absence of a secured data lifetime Note It is invalid to set both lifetime values to zero This condition is not enforced by the console in order to avoid order dependencies when configuring the items but will set defaults at runtime Send Initial Contact Message toggles whether or not the IKE negotiation process begins by sending an initial contact message The default is Yes Include Vendor ID Payload toggles whether or not the router includes the vendor ID payload in its IKE Phase 1 messages Independent Phase 2 Re keys toggles whether or not a Phase 2 re keys requires a Phase 1 re key If this item is set to Yes the default Phase 2 re keys will be performed independently when necessary without requiring a Phase 1 re key If this item is set to No each Phase 2 re key will be preceded by a Phase 1 re key This item should normally be set to Yes unless the device is communicating with a non compliant remote IPsec peer that requires that a Phase 1 re key precede each Phase 2 re key Strict Port Policy toggles whether or not IKE requires packets to originate from the IAN
257. rofile The IP Profile Parameters screen varies slightly depending on whether your model router connects directly to the Internet or if it connects via an Ethernet connection through a cable or DSL modem The enabling feature is the same for both Using the Tab key toggle NetBIOS Proxy Enabled from the default No to Yes and press Return Your remote Network Neighborhood becomes accessible from your Windows desktop Note The remote IP address and subnet mask should strictly match the IP address and subnet mask configured on the LAN interface of the remote router See the following example Example LAN IP 192 168 1 0 24 LAN IP 192 168 2 0 24 Pc A Router A gt Tunnel t Router B PC B 100 4 100 When PC A sends a Windows networking broadcast it sends it with a destination IP 192 168 1 255 When Router A receives this broadcast it translates the destination of this broadcast to match the remote IP of the NetBIOS Proxy enabled VPN profiles and it forwards the broadcast through the VPN tunnel When Router B receives this broadcast it sends it on its LAN 4 26 Firmware User Guide Configuration for Router A IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No Remote IP Address 192 168 2 1 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Filter Set NetBIOS Proxy Enabled Yes RIP Profile Options Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Configure IP requirements for a remot
258. rough SNMP Binary Conversion Table C 1 Appendix C Binary Conversion Table This table is provided to help you choose subnet numbers and host numbers for IP and MaclIP networks that use subnetting for IP addresses Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 0 32 100000 64 1000000 96 1100000 1 33 1000001 65 1000001 97 1100001 2 10 34 100010 66 1000010 98 1100010 3 11 35 100011 67 1000011 99 1100011 4 100 36 100100 68 1000100 100 1100100 5 101 37 100101 69 1000101 101 1100101 6 110 38 100110 70 1000110 102 1100110 T 111 39 100111 71 1000111 103 1100111 8 1000 40 101000 72 1001000 104 1101000 9 1001 41 101001 73 1001001 105 1101001 10 1010 42 101010 74 1001010 106 1101010 11 1011 43 101011 75 1001011 107 1101011 12 1100 44 101100 76 1001100 108 1101100 13 1101 45 101101 77 1001101 109 1101101 14 1110 46 101110 78 1001110 110 1101110 15 1111 47 101111 79 1001111 111 1101111 16 10000 48 110000 80 1010000 112 1110000 17 10001 49 110001 81 1010001 113 1110001 18 10010 50 110010 82 1010010 114 1110010 19 10011 51 110011 83 1010011 115 1110011 20 10100 52 110100 84 1010100 116 1110100 21 10101 53 110101 85 1010101 117 1110101 22 10110 54 110110 86 1010110 118 1110110 23 10111 55 110111 87 1010111 119 1110111 24 11000 56 111000 88 1011000 120 1111000 25 11001 57 111001 89 1011001 121 1111001 26 11010 58 111010 90 1011010 122
259. routing information found at the top of messages Note This guide uses the term IP in a very general and inclusive way to identify all of the following m Networks that use the Internet Protocol along with accompanying protocols such as TCP UDP and ICMP m Packets that include an IP header within their structure m Devices that send IP packets About IP Addressing Every networking protocol uses some form of addressing in order to ensure that packets are delivered correctly In IP individual network devices that are initial sources and final destinations of packets are usually called hosts instead of nodes but the two terms are interchangeable Each host on an IP network must have a unique IP address An IP address also called an Internet address is a 32 bit number usually expressed as four decimal numbers separated by periods Each decimal number in an IP address represents a 1 byte 8 bit binary number Thus values for each of the four numbers range from 00000000 to 11111111 in binary notation or from O to 255 in decimal notation The expression 192 168 1 1 is a typical example of an IP address B 2 Firmware User Guide IP addresses indicate both the identity of the network and the identity of the individual host on the network The number of bits used for the network number and the number of bits used for the host number can vary as long as certain rules are followed The local network manager assigns IP host numbers to indivi
260. rrent Configuration Receive Config from Netopia Updating firmware Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization s network administration Follow these steps to update the Router s firmware 1 Make sure you have the firmware file on disk and know the path to its location 2 Select Send Firmware to Netopia and press Return The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the firmware file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new firmware into effect While the system resets the LEDs will blink on and off Utilities and Diagnostics 11 11 Caution Do not manually power down or reset the Router while it is automatically resetting or it could be damaged Downloading configuration files The Router can be configured by downloading a config
261. rs a Backup Management Statistics option To view the Backup Management Statistics from the Main Menu select Statistics amp Logs Main ae Backup Management Menu m Statistics amp Logs Statistics Line Backup 7 11 Statistics amp Logs WAN Event History Device Event History IP Routing Table Served IP Addresses Backup Management Statistics General Statistics System Information Select Backup Management Statistics and press Return Note This option is only visible if backup is not Disabled The Backup Management Statistics screen appears Backup Management Statistics Current Port Primary Backup State Primary Port Failure in Progress Reason Loss of Layer 1 Time Since Detection 0 25 Switchover Time 1 00 FORCE BACKUP m Current Port is a display only field that shows which port is currently in operation Backup State is a display only field that shows the current state of Backup or Recovery m Reason is a display only field that shows the cause for the current state of Backup or Recovery Time Since Detection is a display only field that is only visible if backup or recovery is in progress It displays the elapsed time since detection of either primary WAN line failure or re establishment of the 7 12 Firmware User Guide connection Switchover Time is a display only field that is only visible if backup or recovery is in progress It displays
262. rtual circuit may be either a permanent virtual circuit PVC or a switched virtual circuit SVC Netopia devices support PVCs VCs are identified by a Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI A VPI is an 8 bit value between O and 255 inclusive while a VCI is a 16 bit value between O and 65535 inclusive m Circuits now support attributes in addition to their VPI and VCI values When configuring a circuit you can specify an optional circuit name of up to 14 characters The circuit name is used only to identify the circuit for management purposes as a convenience to aid in selecting circuits from lists The default circuit name is Circuit lt n gt where lt n gt is some number between one and eight corresponding to the circuit s position in the list of up to eight circuits m You can also individually enable or disable a circuit without deleting it This is useful for temporarily removing a circuit without losing the configured attributes m In order to function each circuit must be bound to a Connection Profile or to the Default Profile Among other attributes the profile binding specifies the IP addressing information for use on the circuit Each circuit must be bound to a distinct Connection Profile You cannot bind multiple circuits to the same Connection Profile Multiple ATM PVC configuration ATM VPI VCI Autodetection You can bind multiple circuits to the same Connection Profile Netopia Firmware V
263. s Trans lt lt None gt gt NAT Map List NAT Server Li Filter Set F Remove Filter Receive RIP Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m Select the map list you want to bind to the default profile and press Return The map list you selected will now be bound to the default profile m Select NAT Server List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined server lists IP Parameters Default Profile NAT Server List Name Easy Servers my servers Address Trans lt lt None gt gt s NAT Map List _first_map NAT Server Li Filter Set F Remove Filter Receive RIP Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m Select the server list you want to bind to the default profile and press Return The server list you selected will now be bound to the default profile Note There is no interdependency between NAT and IP Addressing Also the Local WAN IP Address and Mask fields visibility are dependent only on the IP Addressing type NAT Associations Multiple Network Address Translation 3 25 Configuration of map and server lists alone is not sufficient to enable NAT for a WAN connection because map and server lists must be linked to a profile that controls the WAN interface This can be a Connection Profile a WAN Ethernet interface a default profile or a default answer profile Once you have configured your map and server lists
264. s across the line and get back a mixture of ones and zeroes there is a problem You can also use this test in a different way If you send all ones to a remote device it should report that it is receiving all ones This would verify without having to put up a loop that data is reaching the destination intact It does not verify bi directional integrity however which is verified if you have the remote end in loop This pattern is also for checking the remote end s capability of reporting back a yellow alarm usually something that is optionally enabled on the remote CSU Remote Payload Loopback sends an ANSI BPM payload loopback request to the remote CSU This pattern tells the remote device usually the CSU at the other end of the circuit that it should go into a looped state Use this pattern for putting up a loop to do testing from a remote portion of the circuit either by the Telco or by the CPE at the remote end of the circuit This test makes the remote CSU go into a looped state so that any data you send it is returned to you This is useful for determining if the remote CSU is receiving data from the CPE If it does not loop then you can conclude that it is not receiving any data from you Local Payload Loopback enables a local payload loopback This pattern is similar to the Remote Payload Loopback pattern except that it puts the local CSU into a looped state rather than the remote CSU This is useful if the remote side is not able to send a
265. s any port other than what is defined Less Than Anything less than the port defined Less Than or Equal Any port less than or equal to the port defined Security 10 41 Equal Matches only the port defined Greater Than or Equal Greater Than Matches the port or any port greater Matches anything greater than the port defined Example network Example filters Example 1 Input Packet Filter IP 200 1 1 Data Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 28 00011100 200 1 1 28 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Perform the logical AND 10 42 Firmware User Guide 00000000 Logical AND result This incoming IP packet has a source IP address that matches the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 This will not forward this packet Example 2 Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Pe
266. s are given in IP Setup on page 6 2 Filter Sets These screens allow you to configure security on your network by means of filter sets and a basic firewall m Details are given in Security on page 10 1 IP Address Serving These screens allow you to configure IP address serving on your network by means of DHCP WANIP and BootP m Details are given in IP Address Serving on page 6 17 Network Address Translation NAT These screens allow you to configure the Multiple Network Address Translation MultiNAT features m Details are given in Multiple Network Address Translation on page 3 1 WAN and System Configuration 2 37 Stateful Inspection firewall Stateful inspection firewall is a security feature that prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled You can configure UDP and TCP no activity periods that will also apply to NAT time outs if stateful inspection is enabled on the interface Stateful Inspection parameters are active on a WAN interface only if enabled on your Gateway Stateful inspection can be enabled on a profile whether NAT is enabled or not Stateful Inspection UDP no activity timeout sec TCP no activity timeout sec Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address Associations Return Enter goes to new screen Return Enter to configure Xposed IP addresses UDP no activity time out The time in seconds after which a UDP session will be terminated if there is
267. s configuration screens The PAT part of this example setup will allow any user on the Netopia Router s LAN with an IP address in the range of 192 168 1 6 through 192 168 1 254 to initiate traffic flow to the outside world for example the Internet No one on the Internet would be able to initiate a conversation with them The Static mapping part of this example will allow any of the machines in the range of addresses from 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 1 5 to communicate with the outside world as if they were at the addresses 206 1 1 1 through 206 1 1 5 respectively It also allows any machine on the Internet to access any service port on any of these five machines You may decide this poses a security risk You may decide that anyone can have complete access to your FTP server but not to your router and only limited access to the desired services ports on the Web and Mail servers Multiple Network Address Translation 3 35 To make these changes first limit the range of remapped addresses on the Static Map and then edit the default server list called Easy Servers First navigate to the Show Change Map List screen select Easy PAT List and then Show Change Maps Choose the Static Map you created and change the First Private Address from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 4 Now the router Web and Mail servers IP addresses are no longer included in the range of static mappings and are therefore no longer accessible to the outside world Users on
268. s the ones in the Add Filter screen See Adding filters to a filter set on page 10 28 Security 10 31 Change Filter Enabled No Forward No Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 0 Enter the IP specific information for this filter Deleting filters To delete a filter select Delete Input Filter or Delete Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select the filter from the table and press Return to delete it Press Escape to exit the table without deleting the filter Moving filters To reorganize the filters in a filter set select Move Input Filter or Move Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return Then use the up or down arrow key to change the filter s order in the filter set Press Return to accept the new filter location Deleting a filter set Note If you delete a filter set all of the filters it contains are deleted as well To reuse any of these filters in another set before deleting the current filter set you ll have to note their configuration and then recreate them To delete a filter set select Delete Filter Set in the Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets Select a filter se
269. scoustinneae 6 22 More Address Serving OptionS ccsccscesesesesesesenesenes 6 24 Configuring the IP Address Server options 6 25 DHCP Relay ACOM eretia anes ateee 6 30 Connection Profle issuer doetnesee 6 32 MUNRIGASE ForwardiNE sueis aeniea 6 34 Chapter 7 Line Backup 2 c cescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 External Dial BACKUP SUPPOTT ceceseceeesecetenecetenesanenes 7 2 Configuring External Dial BackUp 7 2 WAIN COMMBURAUOM axccctetesscuscuistieiasaneae ciate atiecacaseacel tates 7 2 BackUp Configuration SCTEEM wessevecssrecnccentantennceieecs 7 5 Connection Pronles ic acee cgcnetscsusedtnecs sadieteaneewedetusdtes 7 7 Using Scheduled Connections with Backup 7 8 Management StatistiCS cccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 10 QUICK WIGW saneta naea se ricci destin tn aneslatncddneda ee ctietaiadis 7 12 Contents vii Event LOB Sessan ane Ra 7 12 SNMP SUP DOME errre naaa 7 13 Backup Default Gateway scsacicatesncndsacnatiidenacsedsacacetaddesese 7 13 Backup Configuration SCreen csscssesseesseseeees 7 13 IP Setup SCKE SN wisstncecadckcndaseassatpedd EREE E 7 15 Backup Management Statistics cseceeeneeeees 7 16 QUICKVIEW sic csccnrietdinisiaeandncmatscanbacdanntbasauetndeeanets 7 17 Chapter 8 Voice Configuration ccesceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 NGROO UGH OM ice tctsrectattsecincedawie nade n aai iai 8 1 Explan
270. ss field shows the range of IP addresses available to the hosts of that network Note that the IP addresses given in this section are for example purposes only Do not use these addresses when configuring your network With this configuration both Customer Site A and B can gain Internet access through Routers A and B with no reconfiguration of the ISP s equipment The most important item in this configuration is the static route defined on Router B This tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Router B Without this information Customer Site B will be able to access Customer Site A but not the Internet If it is not possible to define a static route on Router B RIP could be enabled to serve the same purpose To use RIP instead of a static route enable Transmit RIP on Router A and Transmit and Receive RIP on Router B This will allow the route from Customer Site B to propagate on Router B and Customer Site A Example Working with a Class C subnet Suppose that your organization has a site with only 10 hosts and no plans to add any new hosts You don t need a full Class C address for this site Many ISPs offer Internet access with only a portion of a full Internet address For example you might obtain the Class C address 199 14 17 48 with the mask 255 255 255 240 From the previous example you can see that this gives you 14 host addresses to distribute to the hosts at your site In effect your existing network o
271. ss privilege you want this user to have All LAN WAN or for IADs only VOX If you assign any of these privileges limited users will have full access to privileges associated with these interfaces You can customize these privileges further in order to limit access to only certain portions of those interfaces configuration by selecting Custom If you select Custom the Access Privileges Custom screen appears Access Privileges Custom WAN Data Configuration Connection Profile Configuration Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration LAN Data Configuration LAN Subnet Configuration NAT Filters Configuration Preferences Global Configuration Voice Configuration Security 10 5 You can toggle the default user privileges for each user The defaults are set to minimize the possibility of an individual user inadvertently damaging the WAN connection Exercise caution in assigning privileges other than these defaults to limited users WAN Data Configuration No Connection Profile Configuration No Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration No LAN Data Configuration Yes LAN Subnet Configuration Yes NAT Filters Configuration Yes Preferences Global Configuration Yes Voice Configuration IADs only Yes Advanced Security Options The Advanced Security Options screen allows you to configure the global access privileges of users authenticated via a RADIUS server From the Security Options screen select Ad
272. started 07 03 98 Device restarted 07 02 98 DSL IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 02 98 A DSL Channel 1 up 07 02 98 10 gt gt WAN data link activated at 1040 Kbps 07 02 98 DSL IP down channel 1 07 02 98 7 Link 1 down No Synch 07 02 98 05 gt gt WAN data link deactivated 07 02 98 DSL IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 02 98 A Channel 1 up SCROLL DOWN Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling Each entry in the list contains the following information Date Date of the event Time Time of the event Event A brief description of the event Ch The channel involved in the event The first event in each call sequence is marked with double arrows gt gt Failures are marked with an asterisk If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items To scroll up select SCROLL UP at the top of the list and press Return To scroll down select SCROLL DOWN at the bottom of the list and press Return To get more information about any event listed in the WAN Event History select the event and then press Return A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear Press Return or Escape to dismiss the dialog box To clear the event history select Clear History at the bottom of the history screen and press Return Device Event History The D
273. striction as to the number of connections There is no user configuration required for this feature MultiNAT Configuration You configure the MultiNAT features through the console menu m For a simple 1 to many NAT configuration classic NAT or PAT use the Easy Setup Profile configuration described below m For the more advanced features such as server lists and dynamic NAT follow the instructions in m P setup described on page 3 7 m P profile parameters described on page 3 21 Easy Setup Profile configuration The screen below is an example Depending on the type of router you are using fields displayed in this screen may vary Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Connection Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 255 PPP Authentication PAP Send User Name tonyf Send Password kkk kk kkk kkk kkk kk kk kk PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Return Enter brings you to next screen The Local WAN IP Address is used to configure a NAT public address range consisting of the Local WAN IP Address and all its ports The public address map list is named Easy PAT List and the port map list is named Easy Servers The two map lists Easy PAT List and Easy Servers are created by default and NAT configuration becomes effective This will map all
274. sy Setup Profile Easy PAT List my servers Profile 01 my first_map my servers Profile 02 my _second_map my server list Profile 03 my map lt lt None gt gt Profile 04 lt lt None gt gt lt lt None gt gt Default Answer Profile my_ servers Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit m Select the list name you want to assign and press Return again Your selection will then be associated with the corresponding profile or interface Multiple Network Address Translation 3 27 IP Passthrough Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 offers an IP passthrough feature The IP passthrough feature allows for a single PC on the LAN to have the router s public address assigned to it It also provides PAT NAPT via the same public IP address for all other hosts on the private LAN subnet Using IP passthrough The public WAN IP is used to provide IP address translation for private LAN computers The public WAN IP is assigned and reused on a LAN computer DHCP address serving can automatically serve the WAN IP address to a LAN computer When DHCP is used for addressing the designated passthrough PC the acquired or configured WAN address is passed to DHCP which will dynamically configure a single servable address subnet and reserve the address for the configured MAC address This dynamic subnet configuration is based on the local and remote WAN address and subnet mask If the WAN interface does not have a suitable subnet mask that
275. t from the Start menu m If you connect a Macintosh computer you can use the NCSA Telnet program supplied on the Netopia CD You install NCSA Telnet by simply dragging the application from the CD to your hard disk Mac OS X users can run Telnet in the Terminal application found in the Mac OS X Utilities folder Introduction 1 5 Connecting a Console Cable to your Equipment Many Netopia models include a serial console port labeled Console on the back panel You can perform all of the system configuration activities for your Netopia equipment through a local serial console connection if available using terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal provided with Windows 95 98 2000 or NT on the PC or ZTerm included on the Netopia CD for Macintosh computers You attach the Netopia device to either a PC or Macintosh computer via the serial port on the computer On a Macintosh computer the serial port is called the Modem port or Printer port Since Macintosh computers have different serial bus connectors you may need a USB to DB 9 or USB to serial adapter These are available from a variety of third party manufacturers This connection lets you use the computer to configure and monitor the Router via the console screens Example back panel Ethernet 3 2 Console Console connection port DB 9 male To connect to your computer for serial console communication use a console cable appropriate to your
276. t from in the past three minutes on its network are using the new key If any of the peers have not used the new key yet the Netopia router will send RIP updates twice once with each key If the last valid key expires the Device Event History logs a RIP last authentication key expired message and continues to use that key as if it were still valid Authentication configuration To configure RIP 2 MD5 authentication from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup Main Menu 7 System Configuration IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears IP Setup Ethernet IP Address Ethernet Subnet Mask Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway Backup IP Gateway Primary Domain Name Server Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name RIP Options Multicast Forwarding Static Routes Receive RIP Transmit RIP 168 1 1 255 255 0 IP Address Serving Select RIP Options The Ethernet LAN RIP Options screen appears Both vl and v2 v2 MD5 Authentication IP Setup 6 11 6 12 Firmware User Guide m Select Receive RIP and from the pull down menu choose v2 MD5 Authentication Ethernet LAN RIP Options Receive RIP v2 MD5 Authentication Transmit RIP Off RIP v2 Authentication Keys You can also select Transmit RIP and choose v2 MD5 broadcast or v2 MD5 multicast from the pull down menu Ethernet LAN RIP Options Rece
277. t from the list and press Return Select CONTINUE and press Return to delete it A sample filter set This section contains the settings for a filter set called Basic Firewall which is part of the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 s factory configuration 10 32 Firmware User Guide Basic Firewall blocks undesirable traffic originating from the WAN in most cases the Internet but forwards all traffic originating from the LAN It follows the conservative that which is not expressly permitted is prohibited approach unless an incoming packet expressly matches one of the constituent input filters it will not be forwarded to the LAN The five input filters and one output filter that make up Basic Firewall are shown in the table below Setting Input filter Inputfilter Inputfilter Inputfilter Input filter Output 1 2 3 4 5 filter 1 Enabled Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Forward No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Protocol type TCP TCP ICMP TCP UDP 0 Source port No No N A No No N A comparison Compare Compare Compare Compare Source port ID O 0 N A 0 0 N A Dest port Equal Equal N A Greater Greater N A comparison Than Than Dest port ID
278. t security screen 10 16 user accounts 10 15 PAT Port Address Translation 3 2 permanent virtual circuit 2 16 ping 11 2 ping test configuring and initiating 11 2 Index 4 port number comparisons 10 22 port numbers 10 21 PPTP 4 10 tunnel options 4 4 PVC 2 16 Q quality of service 10 35 Quick View 9 1 R restarting the system 11 12 restricting telnet access 10 17 RFC 1483 Transparent Bridging 2 44 RIP 2 MD5 Authentication 6 10 router to serve IP addresses to hosts 6 1 routing tables IP 6 6 9 7 S scheduled connections 2 29 adding 2 31 deleting 2 34 modifying 2 34 once only 2 33 viewing 2 30 weekly 2 32 SDSL IDSL Line Configuration 2 3 security filters 10 18 10 34 measures to increase 10 1 telnet 10 17 user accounts passwords 10 15 security options screen 10 15 protecting 10 16 Security Policy Database SPD 5 2 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP community strings 9 12 MIBs supported 9 10 setup screen 9 11 traps 9 12 SNMP V2c 9 10 src port 10 23 Stateful inspection 2 37 static IP addresses B 8 static route rules of installation 6 9 static routes 6 3 6 6 strong encryption 4 11 subnet masks B 3 subnets B 2 B 5 multiple 6 4 nested B 11 subnets and subnet masks B 2 support technical A 4 T T1 diagnostics 11 12 T1 Line Configuration 2 7 technical support A 4 telnet 1 4 access 10 17 terminal emulation software configuring 1 4 default settings 1 6 TFTP defined 11 6 downloading configura
279. t size minus three since one address is reserved for the network address one for the subnet broadcast address and one for the router s interface address on the subnet You can edit the remaining columns in each row The 1st Client Addr and Clients columns allow you to specify the base and extent of the address serving pool for a particular subnet Entering 0 0 0 0 for the first client address or O for the number of clients indicates that no addresses will be served from the corresponding Ethernet IP subnet The Client Gateway column allows you to specify the default gateway address that will be provided to clients served an address from the corresponding pool The value defaults to the Router s IP address on the corresponding subnet or the Router s default gateway if that gateway is located on the subnet in question You can override the value by entering any address that is part of the subnet DHCP BootP and dynamic WAN clients may receive an address from any one of the address serving pools configured on this screen IP Setup 6 21 Numerous factors influence the choice of served address It is difficult to specify the address that will be served to a particular client in all circumstances However when the address server has been configured and the clients involved have no prior address serving interactions the Router will generally serve the first unused address from the first address pool with an available address The Router s
280. t the primary connection fails A failure can be either line loss for example by central site switch failure or physical cable breakage or in the case of Frame Relay with LMI or PPP loss of end to end connectivity Detection of one of these failures causes the router to switch from using the primary WAN port to using the Console port to which a modem has been attached Alternatively you can choose backup to an alternate gateway on the Ethernet LAN In the event of a loss of primary connectivity you have the option of switching back to the primary port automatically once it has recovered its connection 7 2 Firmware User Guide External Dial Backup Support Netopia equipment that supports the external dial backup feature automatically display the serial port configuration menus described in the following sections Models that do not support external dial backup do not display external dial backup related menus but offer menus for backup to a default gateway Generally models that support external dial backup can be determined from the following matrix IADs Yes Yes Yes i Data Routers Yes Yes Yes ADSL models do not currently support dial backup but will support it in a revision in the near future Configuring External Dial Backup Four menus support external dial backup configuration m the Serial Port Configuration menu under the WAN Configuration menus Here you select the Modem Auto mode to allow the Console
281. tarts from the pool on the first row and continues to the pool on the last row of this screen Once the address server and or the clients have participated in address serving transactions different rules apply m When requesting an address a client will often suggest an address to be assigned such as the one it was last served The Router will attempt to honor this request if the address is available The client stores this address in non volatile storage for example on disk and the specific storage method location differs depending on the client operating system m When requesting an address a client may provide a client identifier or if it does not the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 may construct a pseudo client identifier for the client When the client subsequently requests an address the Router will attempt to serve the address previously associated with the pseudo client identifier This is normally the last address served to the client m Otherwise the Netopia will select the least recently used available address starting from the first address in the first pool and ending with the last address in the last pool Note The address serving pools on this screen are tied to the IP subnets configured on the IP Subnets screen Changes to the IP Subnets screen may affect this screen In particular deleting a subnet on the IP Subnets screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool if any on this screen 6 22 Firmware User Gu
282. te or ADI Select Trellis Coding Enabled Toggle it to On the default or Off Select Signaling Mode and choose Echo Cancellation or FDM the default If you selected Multimode Circuit Type the Fast Retrain Enabled field appears Toggle it to On the default or Off 5 Select Data Link Encapsulation and press Return The pop up menu will offer you the choice of PPP or RFC1483 6 Press Escape to return to the WAN Configuration screen For multiple permanent virtual circuit PVC configurations see Multiple ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits on page 2 16 WAN and System Configuration 2 3 SDSL IDSL Configuration screen The SDSL IDSL Line Configuration screen is shown below SDSL Line Conf Line Type SDSL ATM Operation Mode SDSL HDLC IDSL IDSL CM Data Rate Mode Data Rate Data Link Encapsulation PPP PPP Mode vc Multiplexed Return Enter to select lt among between gt Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company m Select a Line Type from the pull down menu You can choose SDSL ATM SDSL HDLC IDSL or IDSL CM For IDSL connections choose IDSL if your service provider uses most common central office equipment choose IDSL CM if your service provider uses Copper Mountain equipment If you choose either IDSL type the router must reboot and you will see a warning screen to confirm your choice IDSL configuration offers different options See IDSL Line Configuration scre
283. te a sample filtering setup to allow either PPTP or ATMP traffic to cross a firewall m PPTP example on page 4 20 m ATMP example on page 4 22 Make your own appropriate substitutions For more information on filters and firewalls see Chapter 10 Security 4 20 Firmware User Guide PPTP example To enable a firewall to allow PPTP traffic you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound TCP packets specifically destined for port 1723 The source port may be dynamic so often it is not useful to apply a compare function upon this portion of the control negotiation packets You must also set the firewall to allow inbound and outbound GRE packets enabling transport of the tunnel payload From the Main Menu navigate to Display Change IP Filter Set and from the pop up menu select Basic Firewall Main System Filter Display Change Basic Menu Configuration Sets m Filter Set Firewall Select Display Change Input Filter Display Change Input Filter screen 2000 Yes No 6000 Yes No Select Input Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 1 screen set the Destination Port information as shown below Change Input Filter Enabled Yes Forward Yes Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type TCP Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare Equal Dest Port ID 1723 Establishe
284. tem below If you selected None in the Frame Relay Configuration screen go to step 6 Below the Remote IP Address field the following Data Flow Parameters appear m The CIR Committed Information Rate represents the average capacity available to a given PVC Per manent Virtual Circuit or DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier The setting defaults to 64000 but you may modify the capacity rate by toggling the selection in the Use Default field to No You can then enter a different capacity rate in the Value field m The Be Committed Burst Size represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame Relay service WAN and System Configuration 2 15 provider agrees to transfer from a given PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or DLC Data Link Connection Identifier The setting defaults to 64000 but you may modify the committed burst size by toggling the selection in the Use Default field to No You can then enter a different committed burst size in the Value field m The Be Excess Burst Size represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame Relay service provider will attempt to deliver to a given PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or DLC Data Link Connection Identifier The setting defaults to O but you may modify the excess burst size by toggling the selection in the Use Default field to No You can then enter a different excess burst size in the Value field Note Some Frame Relay service providers allow for over subscription of the DLC
285. ter Set Remove Filter Set Multicast Forwarding RIP Profile Options Typically you will have a Connection Profile that you created in Easy Setup You may have more Select the Connection Profile that you want to use from the Display Change Connection Profile menu and then select IP Profile Parameters By default Multicast Forwarding is turned off None on Connection Profiles until you enable a specific Connection Profile to receive multicast data You enable it by selecting Rx from the pull down menu Line Backup 7 1 Chapter 7 Line Backup The firmware offers line backup functionality in the event of a line failure on a DSL Ethernet or leased line primary WAN link The firmware supports backup m to an external modem connected to the Console port or m to a backup default gateway Configuration of either method is similar but differences are noted in their respective sections This chapter covers the following topics m External Dial Backup Support on page 7 2 m Configuring External Dial Backup on page 7 2 m WAN Configuration on page 7 2 m Connection Profiles on page 7 7 m Using Scheduled Connections with Backup on page 7 8 m Management Statistics on page 7 10 m QuickView on page 7 12 m Event Logs on page 7 12 m SNMP Support on page 7 13 m Backup Default Gateway on page 7 13 The purpose of backup is to provide a recovery mechanism in the event tha
286. ter any IP Parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape For more information see IP Setup on page 6 2 Select COMMIT and press Return Your new Connection Profile will be added If you want to view the Connection Profiles in your device return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Display Change Connection Profile The list of Connection Profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop up screen WAN Configuration IP Address Easy Setup Profile 255 225 255 255 Profile 1 0 0 0 0 2 28 Firmware User Guide The Default Profile If you are using RFC1483 data link encapsulation the Default Profile screen controls whether or not the DSL link will come up without an explicitly configured connection profile PPP datalink encapsulation does not support a default profile and the corresponding menu item is unavailable See Connection Profiles on page 6 32 for more information You access the Default Profile screen from the Main Menu by selecting WAN Configuration and then selecting Default Profile Main WAN WAN Menu Configuration Default Profile The Default Profile screen appears WAN Default Profile Must Match a Defined Profile No IP Parameters m You can set Must Match a Defined Profile item to Yes or No the default This item controls whether or not the DSL link will come up without an explicitly configured connection profi
287. thaict secesemene coat ateusesietee N 11 4 MEIMET Que Mesa cssesncsncsesecevecuveancsgesareteskwnancisascaecise caataeses 11 5 Facon DETI caie cratictestccagtadtetgacmancandatatet se 11 6 Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with TFTP 11 6 Contents ix Updating MWA E sionas a 11 7 Downloading configuration fileS rsrsrsrsrs 11 8 Uploading configuration files csscsscseeeseeees 11 9 Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files With XMO DEM carsoniana AAN 11 9 Updating MONWA Esinsin aaa 11 10 Downloading configuration files a se 11 11 Uploading configuration files cccceeeseeeeeneees 11 11 Restarting the SySteMi sisicama nanasi aR 11 12 TL Line Statistics and DiagNoStiCS siiiccssdscecsrcesteceteceees 11 12 Appendix A TroubleShooting c ccscesseeseeseneeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneneees A 1 COMMSULATION Problem Sassa aeii A 1 Console connection problems 0 s2cscceeeeeeees A 2 Network Problem Sisecccssicssckocecscuacenacensesancnccesacdenanes A 2 How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults A 3 Power OQULASES iinne iaa a e A 3 Technical Suppor tsena E A 4 How to reach US scanso A 4 Appendix B Understanding IP Addressing c sssssssssesseeees B 1 Wiari sP son an r E EE AE B 1 About IP Addressing 2 c ccsiccessneccabenesdedencceetess sosend angnacta pends B 1 SubNets and subnet MASKS sicececssessecesiccscedeessercsese B 2 Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet
288. that the DNS server s IP address is correct and that it is reachable from the Router use Ping m If you are using filters check that your filter sets are not blocking the type of connections you are trying to make Local routing problems m Observe the Ethernet LEDs to see if data traffic flow appears to be normal m Check the WAN statistics and LAN statistics screens to see more specific information on data traffic flow and address serving See Statistics amp Logs on page 9 4 for more information Troubleshooting A 3 How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults Lose your password This section shows how to reset the router so that you can access the console screens once again Keep in mind that all of your connection profiles and settings will need to be reconfigured If you don t have a password the only way to get back into the Router is the following 1 Turn the router upside down 2 Referring to the diagram below find the paper clip size Reset Switch slot Reset Switch Slot 3 Carefully insert the larger end of a standard size paper clip until you contact the internal Reset Switch No need to unwind the paper clip Press this switch 5 This will reset the unit to factory defaults and you will now be able to reprogram the router Power Outages If you suspect that power was restored after a power outage and the Router is connected to a remote site you may need to switch the Router off and then back o
289. the Internet will not be able to Telnet Web SNMP or ping to them It is best also to navigate to the public range screen and change the Static Range to go from 206 1 1 5 Next navigate to Show Change Server List and select Easy Servers and then Add Server You should export both the Web www http and Mail smtp ports to one of the now free public addresses Select Service and from the resulting pop up menu select www http In the resulting screen enter your Web server s address 192 168 1 2 and the public address for example 206 1 1 2 and then select ADD NAT SERVER Now return to Add Server choose the smtp port and enter 192 168 1 3 your Mail server s IP address for the Server Private IP Address You can decide if you want to present both your Web and Mail services as being on the same public address 206 1 1 2 or if you prefer to have your Mail server appear to be at a different IP address 206 1 1 3 For the sake of this example alias both services to 206 1 1 2 Now as before the PAT configuration will allow any user on the Netopia Router s LAN with an IP address in the range of 192 168 1 6 through 192 168 1 254 to initiate traffic flow to the Internet Someone at the FTP server can access the Internet and the Internet can access all services of the FTP machine as if it were at 206 1 1 5 The router cannot directly communicate with the outside world The only communication between the Web server and the Internet is through port 80 the
290. the tunnel A value of zero disables the timer Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is torn down use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged m Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes NAT Map List Easy PAT NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 173 167 8 10 Remote IP Mask 255 255 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options m Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel Encryption Support Encryption is a method for altering user data into a form that is unusable by anyone other than the intended recipient The recipient must have the means to decrypt the data to render it usable to them The encryption process protects the data by making it difficult for any third party to get at the original data Netopia PPTP is fully compatible with Microsoft Point to Point Encryption MPPE data encryption for user data transfer over the PPTP tunnel Microsoft Windows NT Server provides MPPE encryption capability only when Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol MS CHAP is enabled Netopia complies with this feature to allow MPPE only when MS CHAP is negotiated MS CHAP and MPPE are user selectable options in the
291. ther traffic is passing through it or not This will effectively nail up the tunnel 5 18 Firmware User Guide IPsec WAN Configuration Screens You can also configure IKE Phase 1 Profiles in the WAN Configuration menus Main Menu IKE Phase 1 m WAN Configuration Configuration The WAN Configuration screen now includes IKE Phase 1 Configuration as shown WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile Accounting Configuration Establish WAN Connection Disconnect WAN Connection From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information Select IKE Phase 1 Configuration and press Return The IKE Phase 1 Configuration screen appears Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 19 IKE Phase 1 Configuration Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile Add IKE Phase 1 Profile Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile The IKE Phase 1 Configuration screen allows configuration of global non connection profile specific IPsec parameters This screen allows you to Display Change Add or Delete an IKE Phase 1 profile IPsec Manual Key Entry The Version 5 3 firmware has a redesigned layout and additional options for manual key entry If you selected Manual Key Management in the IPsec Tunnel Options screen you will need to enter your encryption keys in the IPsec Man
292. this hierarchical structure each filter is said to have a priority The first filter has the highest priority and the last filter has the lowest priority How individual filters work As described above a filter applies criteria to an IP packet and then takes one of three actions m Forwards the packet to the local or remote network m Blocks discards the packet m Ignores the packet A filter forwards or blocks a packet only if it finds a match after applying its criteria When no match occurs the filter ignores the packet A filtering rule The criteria are based on information contained in the packets A filter is simply a rule that prescribes certain actions based on certain conditions For example the following rule qualifies as a filter Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP address 199 211 211 17 If a match occurs the packet is blocked Here is what this rule looks like when implemented as a filter on the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 To understand this particular filter look at the parts of a filter Security 10 21 Parts of a filter A filter consists of criteria based on packet attributes A typical filter can match a packet on any one of the following attributes m The source IP address where the packet was sent from m The destination IP address where the packet is going m The type of higher layer
293. tion allowing the use of the public Internet to look virtually like a private secure network When two networks communicate with each other through a network based on the Internet Protocol they are said to be tunneling through the IP network w Logical ca D Equivalent D GZ as Ae Unlike the phone company private and public computer networks can use more than one protocol to carry your information over the wires Three such protocols are in common use for tunnelling Point to Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol ATMP and IP Security IPSec The Netopia Router can use any one m Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is an extension of Point to Point Protocol PPP and uses a client and server model Netopia s PPTP implementation is compatible with Microsoft s and can function as either the client PAC or the server PNS As a client a Netopia R series router can provide all users on a LAN with secure access over the Internet to the resources of another LAN by setting up a tunnel with a Windows NT server running Remote Access Services RAS or with another Netopia Router As a server a Netopia R series router can provide remote users a secure connection to the resources of the LAN over a dial up cable DSL or any other type of Internet access Because PPTP can create a VPN tunnel using the Dial Up Networking DUN see Dial Up Networking for VPN on page 4 14 utility built into Windows 95
294. tion files 11 8 updating firmware 11 7 uploading configuration files 11 9 TFTP transferring files 11 6 tiered access 10 2 TOS bit 10 35 Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP 11 6 Trivial File Transfer Protocol see TFTP troubleshooting A 1 configuration PC A 1 event histories 9 4 trusted host 10 33 trusted subnet 10 33 tunnel options ATMP 4 8 PPTP 4 4 tunneling 4 2 U Universal Plug and Play UPnP 10 2 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR 2 18 updating firmware with TFTP 11 7 with XMODEM 11 10 updating Netopia s firmware 11 7 upgrade 1 3 uploading configuration files 11 9 with TFTP 11 9 with XMODEM 11 11 user accounts 10 15 utilities and diagnostics 11 1 V viewing scheduled connections 2 30 Index 5 Virtual Private Networks VPN 4 1 VPN 4 1 allowing through a firewall 4 19 ATMP tunnel options 4 8 default answer profile 4 11 encryption support 4 10 PPTP tunnel options 4 4 W WAN event history 9 5 WAN event history 9 5 Windows NT Domain Name 4 6 X XMODEM 11 9 XMODEM file transfers downloading configuration files 11 11 updating firmware 11 10 uploading configuration files 11 11 Index 6
295. tocol SNMP agent allowing monitoring and configuration by a standard SNMP manager Netopia Routers and IADs now support both SNMP V1 and SNMP V2c Enterprise specific SNMP Changes Enterprise specific SNMP changes in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 include restarting the device as a bridge or router and controlling the WAN changes reset immediately item Restart Item The OID responsible for restarting the router can now tell it to startup as a router or a bridge Note that if the device was a router and is now told to be a bridge or vice versa the device will be factory defaulted WAN Changes take effect immediately This item is found in the console menu and is now added as an SNMP OID The router will reboot if the value is changed These changes have been added to the SNMP MIB file NETOPIA MIB This MIB is available by anonymous ftp from the Netopia ftp server MIBs are available in a variety of formats Load this MIB into your SNMP management software Follow the instructions included with your SNMP manager on how to load MIBs The Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 supports the following management information base MIB documents MIB II RFC 1213 m Interface MIB RFC 1229 m Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 m Netopia MIB m SNMP v2 Traps SNMP v2 MIB RFC1907 v2 traps only npaV2trap mib Netopia specific m ATM ATM TC RFC2514 ATM MIB RFC2515 m ADSL ADSL MIB RFC2662 These MIBs are on the Netopia CD included with the
296. tom filter sets Each filter set can contain up to 16 output filters and up to 16 input filters To add a new filter set select Add Filter Set in the Filter Sets screen and press Return The Add Filter Set screen appears Add Filter Set Filter Set Name Filter Set 3 ADD FILTER SET Naming a new filter set All new filter sets have a default name The first filter set you add will be called Filter Set 1 the next filter will be Filter Set 2 and so on To give a new filter set a different name select Filter Set Name and enter a new name for the filter set To save the filter set select ADD FILTER SET The saved filter set is empty contains no filters but you can return to it later to add filters see Adding filters to a filter set on page 10 28 10 28 Firmware User Guide Adding filters to a filter set There are two kinds of filters you can add to a filter set input and output Input filters check packets received from the Internet destined for your network Output filters check packets transmitted from your network to the Internet O input filter WAN q p LAN packet output filter The Netopia Router Packets in the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 pass through an input filter if they originate in the WAN and through an output filter if they re being sent out to the WAN The process for adding input and output filters is exactly the same The main difference between the two i
297. tunnel Because the router normally re keys prior to the expiration of the current Phase 1 SAs multiple valid Phase 1 SAs may exist during the period of time after the router has re keyed and established new Phase 1 SAs and the time at which the old Phase 1 SAs expire m If you select Newest SAs Immediately the router will begin using the newly created Phase 1 SAs immediately after they are negotiated m If you select Old SAs Until Expired the router will continue using the old Phase 1 SAs until they expire and will begin using the newly created Phase 1 SAs only after the old ones are no longer valid Allow Dangling Phase 2 SAs toggles whether or not Phase 2 SAs are permitted to survive the expiration of Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 7 the Phase 1 SAs under which they were created Phase 2 SAs dangle when the Phase 1 SA under which they were created expires before they do There is no requirement that the Phase 1 SA exist for the duration of the Phase 2 SA s lifetime but it is convenient because a Delete message may be sent The two SA Lifetime items specify the lifetime associated with each Phase 1 SA and control when the SA will expire and become invalid m Phase 1 SA Lifetime seconds specifies the duration in seconds for which the SA will remain valid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is 28 800 seconds The value ze
298. tup The IP Setup options screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of the Router The information you enter here controls how the router routes IP traffic Consult your network administrator or ISP to obtain the IP setup information such as the Ethernet IP address Ethernet subnet mask default IP gateway and Primary Domain Name Server IP address you will need before changing any of the settings in this screen Changes to these settings that you make in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia device is reset To go to the IP Setup options screen from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 128 117 162 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway 192 128 117 163 Backup IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name yourdomain com RIP Options Multicast Forwarding Static Routes IP Address Serving Follow these steps to configure IP setup for your Router m Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the Router s Ethernet port m Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for the Ethernet IP address that you entered in the last step m If you desire multiple subnets select Define Additional Subnets If you select this item you will be taken to the IP Subnets screen
299. tup screen in the System Configuration menu m Then you associate it with a Connection Profile in the IP Profile Parameters screen in the Add Display Change Connection Profile menus Navigate to the IP Setup screen Main Menu m System Configuration IP Setup 6 35 IP Setup By default Multicast Forwarding is tuned off None You enable the router to transmit multicast data by selecting Tx from the pull down menu IP Setup Ethernet IP Address Ethernet Subnet Mask Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway Backup IP Gateway Primary Domain Name Server Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name Receive RIP Transmit RIP Multicast Forwarding IGMP Version Static Routes 168 1 1 255 255 0 IP Address Serving If you enable Multicast Forwarding you will see a new option IGMP Version This lets you choose V1 or V2 If you know you will be communicating with other hosts that are limited to V1 select V1 otherwise allow the default V2 Navigate to the IP Profile Parameters screen Main Menu m WAN Configuration Add Display Change Connection Profile 6 36 Firmware User Guide IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Fil
300. u will be challenged to confirm this choice This change requires a reboot and will result in Factory Defaulting the device CONTINUE If you chose CONTINUE the device will reboot and restart in bridge mode Routing features will be disabled and the console menus corresponding configuration items such as Easy Setup will be removed WAN and System Configuration 2 45 Netopia Router WAN Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick View You can reinstate router mode by returning to the System Configuration menu System Configuration Management IP Setup Filter Sets Date and Time Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Router A Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Select Change Device to a Router Press Return confirm your choice and the device will restart in router mode Bridged Frame Relay Note Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 now supports additional Frame Relay configuration options when the Netopia device is operating in bridged mode Bridged Frame Relay RFC 2427 is an extension of the existing onboard Frame Relay capability Frame Relay capable Netopia routers ex T 1 IDSL may be run in bridged mode with the WAN handling Frame Relay packets that are bridged to the Ethernet interface For these models LM
301. ual Keys screen IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management Manual Encapsulation ESP ESP Encryption Transform ESP Authentication Transform IPsec Manual Keys COMMIT 5 20 Firmware User Guide Select IPsec Manual Keys and press Return IPsec Manual Keys SHA1 ESP Auth Key SHA1 AH Auth Key Depending on your selections of Encapsulation Encryption Transform and Authentication Transform in the IPsec Tunnel Options screen the IPSec Manual Keys screen will display differing entry fields to enter authorization keys and encryption keys With Manual Keys you must manually configure identical authentication and encryption keys at both ends of the tunnel The authentication keys are either 32 for MD5 or 40 for SHA1 ascii hex characters while the encryption keys are 16 for DES or 48 for triple DES ascii hex characters VPN Quickview Statistics are displayed on the VPN Quick View screen Main Quick VPN The VPN Quick View screen has been modified slightly in firmware version 5 3 Profile Name HA lt gt FA1 Jony Fon HA lt gt FA3 Sleve M My IPsec Tunnel Bangalore Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 21 VPN Quick View Type Rx Pckts Tx Pckts Discard Remote Address ATMP 99 99 173 166 82 8 ATMP 14 63 193 117 91 IPsec 12 0 0 0 0 PPTP 35 11 1 1 If the remote tunnel end point is a hostname or 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is displayed unti
302. ublic network in a manner that provides the same security and features formerly available only in private networks VPNs allow networks to communicate across an IP network Your local networks connected to the Netopia Router can exchange data with remote networks that are also connected to a VPN capable router This feature provides individuals at home on the road or in branch offices with a cost effective and secure way to access resources on remote LANs connected to the Internet with Netopia Routers The feature is built around three key technologies PPTP IPsec and ATMP 4 4 Firmware User Guide About PPTP Tunnels To set up a PPTP tunnel you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant information for the remote PPTP partner You use the same procedure to initiate a PPTP tunnel that terminates at a remote PPTP server or to terminate a tunnel initiated by a remote PPTP client PPTP configuration To set up the router as a PPTP Network Server PNS capable of answering PPTP tunnel requests you must also configure the VPN Default Answer Profile See ATMP PPTP Default Profile on page 4 11 for more information PPTP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles It is not an option in device or link configuration screens as PPTP is not a native encapsulation Consequently the Easy Setup Profile does not offer PPTP datalink encapsulation See the Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 24 for
303. ulation type you can now configure the Frame Relay options from the WAN Configuration menu WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile Default Profile Frame Relay Configuration Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Return Enter for WAN line configuration From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information From the WAN Configuration screen select WAN Setup then select the Frame Relay Configuration option and press Return The Frame Relay Configuration screen appears 2 10 Firmware User Guide Frame Relay Configuration LMI Type ANSI Annex D T391 Polling Interval in secs 10 N391 Polls Full Status Cycles 6 N392 Error Threshold 3 N393 Monitored Event Window 4 Tx Injection Management Standard Default CIR 64000 Default Bc 64000 Default Be 0 Congestion Management Enabled No Maximum Tx Frame Size Return Enter goes to new screen Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company 1 Select LMI Type Link Management Type and press Return From the pop up menu highlight either ANSI Annex D CCITT Annex A LMI or None The default is None Press Return See Frame Relay DLCI configuration on page 2 11 for instructions Specifying the Link Management Type is the first step in configuring Frame Relay m If you select an LMI Type Link Management Ty
304. unning NetMeeting to use for communication The customer does not have enough IP addresses to create a one to one mapping for each of the seven users This is where dynamic NAT applies The customer can configure four of these addresses to be used for Dynamic NAT The fifth address is then used for the eight other machines that do not need one to one mappings As each machine configured to use addresses from the dynamic pool tries to connect to the Internet it is allocated a public IP address to use temporarily Once the communication has been terminated that IP address is freed for one of the other six hosts to use 3 4 Firmware User Guide Available for Dynamic NAT Used for Normal NAT 3 2 Boi lod RI N N N RI N N N N N a a a D D gt gt D a a a N N N N N a WAN Network ite pd e ele el elele eleke elel eleele LAN Network 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 a dd ss as ss ee ed ee 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 pede id i as ad is ls al ld fpi id Bonia Baia Pais Exterior addresses are allocated to internal hosts on a demand or as needed basis and then made available when traffic from that host ceases Once an internal host has been allocated an address it will use that address for all traffic Five minutes after all traffic ceases no pings all TCP connections closed no DNS requests etc
305. up menu item displays the name of the currently associated IKE Phase 1 Profile if any or is blank if no IKE Phase 1 profile is associated with the tunnel The pop up menu lists the names of all currently defined IKE Phase 1 Profiles The pop up menu also includes an lt lt ADD PH1 PROFILE gt gt item to allow you to define a new IKE Phase 1 Profile directly without first going to the IPsec Configuration screen and a lt lt NONE gt gt item to allow you to dissociate an existing IKE Phase 1 Profile from the IPsec tunnel The remainder of the screen allows you to configure the IKE Phase 2 parameters that control the contents of the single IKE Phase 2 proposal sent by the router These same items specify the values that must be offered by one of the remote peer s proposals The Encapsulation pop up menu allows you to select what IPsec encapsulations will be used ESP only the default AH only or AH ESP both AH and ESP An AH Authentication Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected AH or AH ESP encapsulation allows you to specify the type of AH authentication HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA1 96 The ESP Encryption Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected ESP or AH ESP encapsulation allows you to specify the type of ESP encryption DES 3DES or NULL no encryption The ESP Authentication Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected ESP or AH ESP encapsulation allows you t
306. uration file The downloaded file reconfigures all of the Router s parameters Configuration files are available from a site maintained by your organization s network administrator or from your local site see Uploading configuration files below Follow these steps to download a configuration file 1 Make sure you have the configuration file on disk and know the path to its location 2 Select Send Config to Netopia and press Return The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to send a saved configuration to your Netopia If so when you hit Return Enter on the CONTINUE button you will have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program CONTINUE 3 Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file If you choose CONTINUE you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of the configuration file If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer s failure You can then try again The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new configuration into effect Uploading configuration files A file containing a snapshot of the Router s current configuration can be uploaded from the router to disk The file can then be downloaded by a different Router to configure its parameters see
307. ure is designed to notify you that congestion avoidance procedures should be initiated where applicable for traffic in the same direction as the received frame It indicates that the frame in question has encountered congested resources Note The Congestion Management Enabled field will only appear if Standard or Buffered is selected as the option from the Tx Injection Management field 4 Select Maximum Tx Frame Size and press Return The default is automatically set to a value suitable for encapsulating a full Ethernet packet s transmission load however you can change the Maximum Frame Size to suit your network s transmission load Press Return You are now finished configuring the Frame Relay Configuration screen Press the Escape key to return to the WAN Configuration screen If you need to configure your DLCls go to the next section Frame Relay DLCI configuration If you selected None as your LMI Type then you will need to manually configure your DLCls A Frame Relay DLCI is a set of parameters that tells the Netopia Router how to initially connect to a remote destination The Netopia Router supports up to 16 different Frame Relay DLC profiles Each Frame Relay DLC configuration you set up allows the Netopia Router to connect your network to another network that uses IP over Frame Relay 2 12 Firmware User Guide To go to the Frame Relay DLCI configuration screen select Frame Relay DLCI Configuration in the WAN Configuratio
308. urns busy locally generated Incoming calls are allowed Extension calls locally switched are allowed m Speed Dial Centrex Mode In Centrex Mode when you pick up the phone dial tone from the central office is present It is therefore not possible to program the phone or use speed dial in this mode from the phone Speed Dial PBX Local Switching mode In this mode you have the ability to pick up the phone receive local dial tone and proceed to program the phone w local speed dial options In addition taking the phone off hook and pressing speed dial numbers will cause the stored speed dial digits to be sent out This is independent of the previous mode Configuring the Voice Features This section describes how to configure the voice telephone features in Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 From the Main Menu select Voice Configuration Netopia IAD Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration Voice Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration You always start from this main screen The Voice Configuration screen appears Voice Configuration 8 3 Voice Configuration Voice Gateway CopperCom Ring Cadence 20 Hz Port Configuration Voice Coding mu law LES Profile Number Profile 9 Select Voice Gateway and from the pop up menu choose the type of voice gateway dev
309. using criteria other than the destination IP address This is called policy based routing You are now able to route IP traffic based on the following m source IP address m source and or destination protocol field m source and or destination port numbers m TOS field You specify the routing criteria and routing information by using IP filtersets to determine the forwarding action of a particular filter In previous firmware versions a filter would either pass or block the specified traffic Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 adds a third option force routing You specify a gateway IP address and each packet matching the filter is routed according to that gateway address rather than by means of the global routing table In addition the TOS field has been added to the classifier list in a filter This allows you to filter on TOS field settings in the IP packet if you desire Security 10 35 The new filterset screen appears as follows Change Input Filter 1 Force Routing Gateway IP Address Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask TOS TOS Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID Return Enter to set comparison of packet Port ID and Filter Port ID Enter the packet specific information for this filter To use the policy based routing feature you create a filter that forwards the traffic m Toggle Forward to
310. utes Display Change Static Route Add Static Route Delete Static Route Configure View Delete Static Routes from this and the following Screens Viewing static routes To display a view only table of static routes select Display Change Static Route The table shown below will appear 163 176 8 1 Select a Static Route to modify The table has the following columns Dest Network The network IP address of the destination network 6 8 Firmware User Guide Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the destination network Next Gateway The IP address of the router that will be used to reach the destination network Priority An indication of whether the Router will use the static route when it conflicts with information received from RIP packets Enabled An indication of whether the static route should be installed in the IP routing table To return to the Static Routes screen press Escape Adding a static route To add a new static route select Add Static Route in the Static Routes screen The Add Static Route screen will appear Add Static Route Static Route Enabled Yes Destination Network IP Address 0 0 0 0 Destination Network Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Next Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Route Priority High Advertise Route Via RIP No ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW Configure a new Static Route in this Screen m To install the static route in the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled
311. utomatic to determine how the system will return to the WAN link when it becomes available again If you choose Automatic the next two menu items become visible Note Automatic recovery only works upon loss of WAN connectivity m f you chose Automatic Recovery select Requires Recovery of Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before attempting to switch back to the WAN connection This allows you to be sure that the WAN connection is well re established before the router switches back to it from the backup mode m You can toggle Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 to Yes or No the default This setting determines whether the router should try to Auto Recover when the backup is invoked because of a Layer 2 loss for example a no valid Connection Profile Layer 1 is still available and this is what recovery checks Line Backup 7 15 Use this setting with caution Setting it to Yes may induce alternating switching between Backup and Recovery Mode This field will determine the recovery behavior of a Manual backup and Ping failure backup These two failures are treated as Layer 2 failures m f you enable Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 the Layer 2 Failure Timer Seconds field becomes vis ible and you can specify how long the Auto Recovery should wait before attempting to recover connec tivity through your primary connection This can prevent alternating switching between Backup and Recovery Mode m Press Escape
312. vanced Security Options The Advanced Security Options screen appears 10 6 Firmware User Guide Advanced Security Options Security Databases Local only RADIUS Server Addr Name RADIUS Server Secret Alt RADIUS Server Addr Name Alt RADIUS Server Secret RADIUS Identifer RADIUS Server Authentication Port RADIUS Access Privileges Telnet Server Port LAN Ethernet IP Filter Set Remove Filter Set m Select RADIUS Access Privileges and from the pull down menu choose which access privilege you want this user to have All LAN WAN or for IADs only VOX If you assign any of these privileges limited users will have full access to privileges associated with these interfaces You can customize these privileges further in order to limit access to only certain portions of those interfaces configuration by selecting Custom If you select Custom the Access Privileges Custom screen appears Access Privileges Custom WAN Data Configuration Yes Connection Profile Configuration Yes Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration Yes LAN Data Configuration Yes LAN Subnet Configuration Yes NAT Filters Configuration Yes Preferences Global Configuration Yes OK CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Since authentication via RADIUS server is by definition authentication of remote users the WAN related defaults are preset to Yes Toggle any that should be changed Security 10 7 User ac
313. ver exactly how many IP host addresses you actually have To configure subnets properly you must also be able to convert between binary notation and decimal notation Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet When setting up IP routing with a Class A address or even with multiple Class C addresses subnetting is fairly straightforward Subnetting a single Class C address between two networks however is more complex This section describes the general procedures for subnetting a single Class C network between two Netopia routers so that each can have Internet access B 4 Firmware User Guide Network configuration Below is a diagram of a simple network configuration The ISP is providing a Class C address to the customer site and both networks A and B want to gain Internet access through this address Router B connects to Router A and is provided Internet access through Routers A and B Customer Site A PC 1 IP Address 192 168 1 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Router B Router A IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Remote IP 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 128 ISP Network Remote Sub 255 255 255 0 Remote IP 192 168 1 129 Gateway 10 0 0 1 Remote Sub Router A Static Route 255 255 255 128 IP Address 10 0 0 1 192 168 1 128 network Gateway 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 mask Usable IP Addresses 255 255 255
314. vices connected to a single 10 100 Ethernet port Key features include m Fax Modem Configurable Voice port for incoming fax or modem calls This is another term for echo cancellation support m Voice Gateway Interoperability CopperCom JetStream Tollbridge TDSoft Zhone and Alcatel General Bandwidth support to follow in an upcoming firmware release Centrex is a simpler variation on the PBX It is a PBX with all switching occurring at a local telephone office instead of at the company s premises Typically the telephone company owns and manages all the communications equipment necessary to implement the PBX and then sells various services to the company Explanation of terms Some telephony terms mean different things in Centrex mode and PBX local switching mode Toll Restriction Speed Dial and Distinctive Ringing Netopia IADs operate in Centrex mode m Toll Restriction Operation Centrex Mode When you pick up the phone you receive a dial tone from the central office When 9 is pressed the Netopia IAD detects 9 and returns a busy tone served by the Centrex system accessible via the IAD Incoming calls are allowed This allows local extension calling through the 8 2 Firmware User Guide central office but not long distance or local calls Toll Restriction Operation PBX Local Switching Mode When you pick up the phone you receive local PBX dial tone When a 9 or outside line code is pressed the IAD detects the digit and ret
315. vided by static mapping Instead of requiring a one to one association of public addresses and private addresses as is required in static mapping dynamic mapping uses a group of public IP addresses to dynamically allocate static mappings to private hosts that are communicating with the public network If a host on the private network initiates a connection to the Internet for example the Netopia Router automatically sets up a one to one mapping of that host s private IP address to one of the public IP addresses allocated to be used for Dynamic NAT As long as this host is communicating with the Internet it will be able to use that address When traffic from that host ceases and no traffic is passed from that host for five minutes the public address is made available again for other private hosts to use as necessary When addresses are returned to the group of available addresses they are returned to the head of the group being the most recently used If that same host requests a connection an hour later and the same public address is still available then it will be mapped to the same private host If a new host which has not previously requested a connection initiates a connection it is allocated the last or oldest public address available Dynamic NAT is a way of sharing a range of public or exterior NAT addresses among one or more groups of private or interior hosts This is intended to provide superior support for applications that t
316. wed WAN Connection Profile or PVC configuration access the WAN Configuration option in the Main Menu is visible If a limited user selects WAN Configuration in the Main Menu the WAN Configuration screen displays its configuration options according to the following diagram User Access Level WAN Configuration WAN WAN Wide Area Network Setup PVC ATM Circuits Configuration Connection Profiles Display Change Connection Profile Connection Profiles Add Connection Profile Connection Profiles Delete Connection Profile Connection Profiles WAN Default Profile Connection Profiles ATMP PPTP Default Profile WAN Conn Profiles Advanced Connection Options WAN Frame Relay Configuration WAN Frame Relay DLCI Configuration All Establish WAN Connection All Disconnect WAN Connection If a limited user selects Advanced Connection Options in the WAN Configuration menu the Advanced Connection Options screen displays its configuration options according to the following diagram 10 10 Firmware User Guide Usor Access Level D WAN Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection Connection Profiles IKE Phase 1 Configuration Connection Profiles Scheduled Connections Connection Profiles Accounting Configuration Backup Configuration Connection Profiles The Superuser can disallow limited user access to a particular Connection Profile When adding a Connection Profile in th
317. wing guidelines m Be sure the filter set s overall purpose is clear from the beginning A vague purpose can lead to a faulty set and that can actually make your network ess secure m Be sure each individual filter s purpose is clear m Determine how filter priority will affect the set s actions Test the set on paper by determining how the filters would respond to a number of different hypothetical packets m Consider the combined effect of the filters If every filter in a set fails to match on a particular packet the packet is m Forwarded if all the filters are configured to discard not forward m Discarded if all the filters are configured to forward m Discarded if the set contains a combination of forward and discard filters Disadvantages of filters Although using filter sets can greatly enhance network security there are disadvantages m Filters are complex Combining them in filter sets introduces subtle interactions increasing the likelihood of implementation errors m Enabling a large number of filters can have a negative impact on performance Processing of packets will take longer if they have to go through many checkpoints m Too much reliance on packet filters can cause too little reliance on other security methods Filter sets are not a substitute for password protection effective safeguarding of passwords caller ID the must match option in the answer profile PAP or CHAP in connection profiles ca
318. work Servers require additional authentication information called Windows NT Domain Name when answering PPTP tunnel connection requests Not all Windows NT installations require this information since not all such installations use this authentication feature The Windows NT Domain Name is not the same as the Internet domain name but is the name of a group of servers that share common security policy and user account databases Your PPTP tunnel partner s administrator will supply this Windows NT Domain Name if it is required If you configure your Router to initiate PPTP tunnel connections by toggling Initiate Connections to Yes the Optional Windows NT Domain Name field appears Enter the domain name your network administrator has supplied You can specify the Idle Timeout an inactivity timer whose expiration will terminate the tunnel A value of zero disables the timer Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is torn down use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 7 The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes NAT Map List Easy PAT NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 173 167 8 10 Remote IP Mask 255 255 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set
319. xt DHCP client that initiates a DHCP lease request or renewal to be the IP passthrough host When the WAN comes up or if it is already up the Router will serve this client the IP passthrough WAN address When this client s lease ends the IP passthrough address becomes available for the next client to initiate a DHCP transaction The next client will get the IP passthrough address Note that there is no way to control which PC has the IP passthrough address without releasing all other DHCP leases on the LAN Note If you specify a non zeroes MAC address the DHCP Client Identifier must be in the format specified above Macintosh computers allow the DHCP Client Identifier to be entered as a name or text however Netopia routers accept only strict binary hex MAC address format Macintosh computers display their strict MAC addresses in the TCP IP Control Panel Classic MacOS or the Network Preference Pane of System Preferences Mac OS X Once configured the passthrough host s DHCP leases will be shortened to two minutes This allows for timely updates of the host s IP address which will be a private IP address before the WAN connection is established After the WAN connection is established and has an address the passthrough host can renew its DHCP address binding to acquire the WAN IP address 3 30 Firmware User Guide A restriction Since both the router and the passthrough host will use same IP address new sessions that conflict with existi
320. y Change Output Filter screen 1723 Yes Yes Yes Yes Select Output Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 1 screen set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below Change Output Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 5150 Select Output Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Output Filter 2 Enabled Yes Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 25 Windows Networking Broadcasts Netopia firmware provides the ability to forward Windows Networking NetBIOS broadcasts This is useful for for example a Virtual Private Network in which you want to be able to browse the remote network to which you are tunnelling as part of your Windows Network Neighborhood Routed connections such as VPNs can not use NetBEUI to carry the Network Neighborhood information They need to use NetBIOS because NetBEUI cannot be routed This feature will allow browsing the Network Neighborhood without any additional workstation configuration You enable this feature in the IP Profile Parameters screen of your Connection P
321. y selecting either Manual or Automatic m Select Requires Data Link Failure of and enter the number of minutes that the system should wait before it assumes that a connection failure has occurred After that period the system would switch to 7 6 Firmware User Guide backup mode and connect via your modem Note Backup and Recovery have resolutions of five seconds This is how often the router evaluates the state of the connections and makes decisions Select Ping Host Name or IP Address and enter an IP address or resolvable DNS name that the router will ping This is an optional item that is particularly useful for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection has gone down Should this address become unreachable the router will treat this as a loss of connectivity and begin the backup timer This loss is a Layer 2 loss Select Recovery to WAN_name where WAN_name is the type of WAN connection you have e g ADSL and press Return Choose either Manual or Automatic to determine how the system will return to the primary WAN link when it becomes available again If you choose Automatic the next two menu items become visible Note Automatic recovery only works upon loss of primary WAN connectivity m If you chose Automatic Recovery select Requires Recovery of and press Return A pop up menu allows you to choose among 30 Sec onds 1 Min ute 2 Min utes 5 Min utes 10 Min utes or 15 Min utes This allows you to be su
322. your private addresses 0 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 to your public address These map lists are bound to the Easy Setup Profile See Binding Map Lists and Server Lists on page 3 21 This is all you need to do if you want to continue to use a single PAT or 1 to many NAT configuration Multiple Network Address Translation 3 7 Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration You use the advanced NAT feature sets by first defining a series of mapping rules and then grouping them into a list There are two kinds of lists map lists made up of dynamic PAT and static mapping rules and server lists a list of internal services to be presented to the external world Creating these lists is a four step process 1 Define the public range of addresses that external computers should use to get to the NAT internal machines These are the addresses that someone on the Internet would see Create a List name that will act as a rule or server holder Create a map or rule that specifies the internal range of NATed addresses and the external range they are to be associated with 4 Associate the Map or Server List to your WAN interface via a Connection Profile or the Default Profile The three NAT features all operate completely independently of each other although they can be used simultaneously on the same Connection Profile You can configure a simple 1 to many PAT often referred to simply as NAT mapping using Easy Setup More complex setups requi
323. ystem group Although optional the information you enter in these items can help a system administrator manage the network more efficiently 9 12 Firmware User Guide Community strings The Read Only Community String and the Read Write Community String are like passwords that must be used by an SNMP manager querying or configuring the Netopia Firmware Version 5 4 An SNMP manager using the Read Only Community String can examine statistics and configuration information from the router but cannot modify the router s configuration An SNMP manager using the Read Write Community String can both examine and modify configuration parameters By default the read only and read write community strings are set to public and private respectively You should change both of the default community strings to values known only to you and trusted system adminis trators To change a community string select it and enter a new value Setting the Read Only and Read Write community strings to the empty string will block all SNMP requests to the router The router may still send SNMP Traps if those are properly enabled Previously if either community string was the empty string SNMP Requests specifying an empty community string were accepted and processed This change is designed to allow the administrator to block SNMP access to the router and to provide more granular control over the allowed SNMP operations to the router m Setting only the Read Write

Netopia 4000-Series Network Router User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents